The Project Gutenberg eBook of The flying buccaneer
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online
at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States,
you will have to check the laws of the country where you are located
before using this eBook.
Title: The flying buccaneer
A novel of adventure in the skies
Author: Jack Binns
Release date: June 17, 2026 [eBook #78892]
Language: English
Original publication: New York: Nicholas L. Brown, 1923
Other information and formats: www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/78892
Credits: Tom Trussel, Tim Lindell and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net (This file was produced from images generously made available by The Internet Archive/American Libraries.)
*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE FLYING BUCCANEER ***
THE FLYING BUCCANEER
THE
FLYING BUCCANEER
_A Novel of Adventure in the Skies_
BY
JACK BINNS
NICHOLAS L. BROWN
NEW YORK, :: 1923
Copyright, 1923
By
NICHOLAS L. BROWN
All Rights Reserved including
Dramatic and Photoplay Rights
Printed in U. S. A.
THE FLYING BUCCANEER
CHAPTER ONE
“Oh! George, something terrible has happened. You must read the paper
right away.”
* * * * *
Mrs. George Cowl, wife of the Secretary of Air, in a state of great
excitement met her husband at the foot of the stairs as he descended,
and handed him a copy of the Washington _Tribune_.
“Look at this!” she exclaimed.
Taking the proffered newspaper Cowl’s eyes fell immediately upon the
eight column “banner” line spread across the front page:
TRANSPACIFIC MAIL AIRSHIP DESTROYED BY AERIAL PIRATE IN MIDOCEAN
Quickly he read the sub-heads, which told in terse sentences a story
of piracy in the Twentieth Century more amazing than any exploit of
the roving buccaneers who struck terror through the Spanish Main two
hundred years ago.
_Giant Rigid Airship Langley Shot Down Midway between Honolulu and
Manila from Altitude of_ 10,000 _feet._
_Survivors Picked Up by Cargo Steamer Yang-Tsze._
_Masked Aerial Pirate Escapes with Valuable Cargo Taken from Langley._
“Good God!” he exclaimed, then turning to his wife, he added, “I’ll
have to go right over to the office, Dear.”
Snatching his hat, Cowl hurriedly kissed his wife, and then rushed out,
leaving his breakfast untouched. He ran as he had not run for years
across the streets to the office in the government building, dodging
the early morning traffic and miraculously escaping injury.
Breathlessly, he dashed into the elevator, to the astonishment of Jim
the night caretaker who had not yet been relieved.
“Take me right up Jim,” he shouted.
Before the caretaker could close the doors of the elevator, Theodore
Mitchell, the Assistant Secretary of Air rushed in, as excited as his
chief. The two men looked at each other for several seconds with an
expression of utter bewilderment written across their faces. In one
momentary flash each read the other’s thoughts, and then Mitchell broke
out:
“It’s evident that you’ve read the paper, George, or you wouldn’t be
here so early. What do you think of it?”
“I don’t know yet,” replied Cowl, “I just glanced over the headlines
and rushed right over. I haven’t read the report yet. I hurried here to
see whether we had been officially advised of it.”
When the elevator stopped on the tenth floor, the two men rushed out
and ran into Cowl’s office.
“You read the newspaper account, while I call up the telegraph office,”
said Mitchell.
Cowl sat down somewhat nervously, and began to read:
Manila, P. I., Sept. 26, 1952.--(By Associated Press.) The mail airship
Langley flying from Yokohama to San Francisco was attacked and shot
down by a mysterious airplane yesterday, according to a brief wireless
dispatch received here from the Captain of the steamer Yang-Tsze. The
passengers and crew of the Langley were picked up by the Yang-Tsze
which is proceeding to this port.
The mysterious airplane which attacked the airship flew away in a
northeasterly direction after removing all the valuable cargo and
sinking the disabled airship.
The details of this act of piracy are contained in a later wireless
report sent by Captain Carruthers, commander of the Langley, from the
Yang-Tsze to Captain Deverest, commander of the naval district, in this
city. This report as given out here reads as follows:
“September 25th, Airship Langley flying on a course due East in
Latitude 20.35 N., Longitude 170.45 E., overtaken by large airplane of
flying boat type. Without warning airplane opened fire at one thousand
yards using three inch incendiary shells from automatic cannon.
“Third shell penetrated valve in number three ballonet, releasing
helium gas. Firing commenced while Langley flying at altitude of 10,000
feet. Langley began to settle, and I ordered colors hoisted as distress
signal. Airplane then ceased firing.
“Langley rapidly settled to surface. Attacking airplane spiralled
down, landed approximately same time as Langley, and then proceeded
in hailing distance. Commander and crew of airplane all wore peculiar
mask-like helmets. Former ordered us to launch boats and abandon
Langley.
“Sea smooth, no wind. Boats launched from disabled Langley without
difficulty, and passengers taken off quietly and in good order.
Commander of airplane ordered us to lay off half a mile from Langley.
Soon as transfer of passengers complete, I ordered officers in charge
of each lifeboat to obey this command, as attacking airplane had
assumed threatening attitude.
“Crew of airplane boarded Langley, and were observed removing part of
cargo. This continued half an hour, then airplane lay off two hundred
yards and opened fire on envelope of Langley with its three inch
cannon. Langley disappeared below surface a few seconds after the fifth
shot was fired.
“Airplane then came over to our boats, and her commander megaphoned
across that he would wireless for assistance. He then took off. Half an
hour later he returned, and informed us that he had sighted a steamer
15 miles SSE of us, and had requested her to come to our assistance,
giving our position.
“The airplane again took off and disappeared in a Northeasterly
direction at terrific speed. One hour later cargo steamer Yang-Tsze
hove in sight and picked us up. Entire ship’s company unharmed, and
passengers all well. Attacking airplane bore no international marks, or
anything of an identifying character.”
It is understood that Captain Carruthers included a complete and
detailed description of the piratical airplane in his wireless report,
but Captain Deverest here refused to make public that portion of the
dispatch on the ground that it was confidential official information.
The remarkable incident has caused quite a stir here, and the aerial
transport companies are considering the advisability of cancelling all
schedules until adequate protection of the airways has been established
by the Department of Air in Washington.
Officials of the Trans-Pacific and Oriental Aerial Line, owners of the
Langley, have cabled details of the affair to the head office at San
Francisco and requested that the Westbound airship Wilbur Wright, which
is due to leave early tomorrow morning, be held up until the government
puts effective patrol units along the course. The officials were
doubtful, however, whether the cable would arrive in time.
CHAPTER TWO
Scarcely had Cowl finished reading the newspaper story when the door
of his office opened and Mitchell entered with Arthur G. Ingleton,
the Secretary of the Navy. The latter’s worried expression seemed to
indicate that the gravity of the situation was even greater than was
apparent from the newspaper report. Looking at his colleague, he said:
“This is a pretty serious situation, George. I’ve just received a
cipher cable from Deverest at Manila giving me complete details of the
affair. From his description of the pirate it looks as though we have
got a pretty desperate character to deal with. His airplane appears to
be something entirely new.
“I am greatly worried, because as you know Mrs. Ingleton and Mary are
due to leave for the Philippines on the Wilbur Wright this morning. I
have got a long distance call in to San Francisco, trying to stop them
from leaving until we get this fellow. We can’t hold up the commercial
lines, but there is no telling where he will strike next. I have cabled
Deverest to make temporary arrangements to police the airways with
naval units until we make some organized effort to hunt this desperado.
“My chief anxiety is for Mary, because I doubt whether I shall reach
her in time to prevent her departure on the Wilbur Wright. She has
had her heart set on this Orient trip for the past six months. Here’s
Deverest’s report. I’ve had it deciphered. You read it while I try to
get the long distance operator again.”
Cowl took the message while Ingleton went back to his own office to
telephone. The message contained the report of Captain Carruthers as
given in the newspaper account, but included the following description
of the pirate machine, which was withheld from the press.
“Carruthers report shows the attacking airplane unlike any known
design. He states it was a monoplane flying boat, apparently of metal
construction throughout. The boat body was squat and wide, but entirely
enclosed. It had the appearance of being constructed of plates riveted
together like a steamship. Length of boat approximately 105 feet. Tail
construction seemed to be very small, but otherwise conventional.
Spread of wings about 110 feet, and chord (width) about 11 feet. Wing
was internally braced and was two feet thick at a point two feet from
leading edge. Wing covering also had appearance of plates riveted
together.
“It is equipped with a disappearing marine screw propeller for cruising
purposes on the surface of the ocean. In the air it is driven forward
by two pusher propellers, but according to Carruthers who examined
it carefully, there is no sign of any engine housing, and just where
the engines are located he could not determine. It was equipped with
a three inch automatic cannon, on a disappearing mount over the nose
of the enclosed hull. The airplane apparently is capable of prodigious
speed, that Carruthers could not account for.”
Mitchell had read the report over his chief’s shoulder.
“It doesn’t tell us very much, does it?” he queried.
A few minutes later Ingleton returned, having failed to get his call.
The operator had told him there would be an hour’s delay. His frantic
appeal that it was an urgent government call had failed to expedite
matters. To Cowl he said:
“Judging from that report, George, we have a pretty hard task before
us, and the only way to handle that brigand will be by means of a
thoroughly organized plan. As I said, I have told Deverest to use the
naval units to take care of the Eastern Pacific airways, and I shall
cable Smith at Honolulu as well as Harrington at San Francisco to put
all their craft on patrol duty. You had better send similar orders to
your commanders, don’t you think?”
At this moment Air Marshall Charles B. Hartley, military director of
the Air Service, entered the room in a state of suppressed excitement.
“I would willingly give up my commission, if only Joe Levanter were
here now,” he said. “He was by far the best man we had, and would have
been just the one for this job. He was a regular daredevil, but at the
same time shrewder than anybody else in the service. I can’t imagine
what became of him.”
The four officials then held a conference to decide their plans. After
some considerable discussion Ingleton jumped up, and started to leave
the room saying as he went:
“I am so worried about Mary and her mother. I am trying to get them off
the airship before it leaves. I am going to try and get San Francisco
again. I’ll be back shortly.”
CHAPTER THREE
The scene of activity that marks the pending departure of a
transoceanic airship was being enacted at the great airport of San
Francisco just as the first streaks of dawn broke over the Eastern sky.
At the peak of terminal tower number six, one thousand feet above the
ground, the airship Wilbur Wright was moored by its nose. The airship
moved slowly and sluggishly back and forth in a small arc of a circle
whenever the fitful breeze caught its glistening sides, as though it
were a mammoth weathercock indicating the direction of the wind.
The top of the tower was a huge revolving globe with a vast socket
on one side. It was in this socket that the nose of the airship was
automatically locked, the entire tower being a mooring post that
enabled the airship to swing to the action of the wind in the same
manner that a steamship swings on its anchor chain to the action of the
tide.
Upon the airship the rigging crew was busily engaged in unscrewing the
feed pipes from the gas valves, after the last volume of helium gas had
been taken into the ballonets. The buoyancy of the gas naturally kept
the giant airship afloat in the sea of air and relieved the tower from
all strain of the ship’s great weight.
Through the center of the tower was a shaft for passenger and freight
elevators. The latter were running at maximum speed, taking up the last
pieces of cargo.
On the aerodrome below, the big transcontinental passenger airplane had
just landed on the concrete runway after a fifteen hour non-stop flight
through the night from New York. It taxied over to the landing platform
at the foot of the tower, after the pilot had drawn up the retractible
wings to the sides of the fuselage.
As it drew alongside the landing platform, a door in the side of
the fuselage swung open, and the workers on the platform put out a
gangplank to the door. The passengers then filed out, carrying their
small hand baggage. They walked into the waiting hall inside the base
of the tower. Here was situated the restaurant, wireless station, and
all other facilities necessary to a terminal station.
Immediately after disembarking the passengers trooped into the
restaurant and ate breakfast, while the terminal employes were busily
engaged in taking their baggage up to the airship.
Among the passengers who had just arrived on the transcontinental
airplane were Mrs. Ingleton, wife of the Secretary of the Navy, and
her daughter Mary. With them was Wing Commander Kenneth Fitzgerald,
an aviation officer who had been transferred from a departmental
executive job at Washington to the command of the air station at
Manila. He was on his way to take over his new command in the East.
In Washington he had been a close friend of the Secretary of the Navy
and his family, and very naturally Mr. Ingleton had asked the commander
to look after Mrs. Ingleton and Mary during their voyage, since all
three were bound for the same destination by the same ship.
Together with the other passengers the three entered the restaurant and
breakfasted.
Mary Ingleton was a prepossessing athletic young lady imbued with the
full sense of importance of her twenty-two Summers. From the moment
of her debut she had been one of the reigning belles in Washington
society, with all the eligible young men of the Capital in her retinue
as willing slaves.
She was a blonde with a crowning aureole of golden tinged hair and her
big flashing blue eyes gave a true indication of the independence that
formed the basis of her character. She was rather tall. Her features
were regular, perfect and charming.
She had been the principal of a hundred romances. All these, however,
were but minor incidents that came and went to form the background of
her life.
Suddenly Washington was confronted with the fact that Mary, the
acknowledged queen, had quit her domain, at the height of her triumphal
conquests, to travel for no apparent purpose in the Orient. Her
departure, so unexpected, set the tongues of gossip and jealousy
awagging. The coincidence of Fitzgerald’s appointment to the Eastern
station was developed to the fullest extent of its possibilities in the
small talk that followed. Six months previously, it was recalled, Joe
Levanter, the dashing young aviator had disappeared, and he had been
one of Mary’s most persistent admirers. He had vanished as completely
as though the earth had swallowed him up.
Since his disappearance, pointed out gossip, there was no doubt about
the change that had come over Mary. From the central figure in the
varied activities of social life she had changed into a recluse and had
begun to take her pleasure more seriously.
With the characteristic imperturbability of youth Mary had remained
oblivious to the covert glances and whispered remarks of those about
her. But there was more than mere imperturbability that made her gaze
so indifferent, her actions so apathetic. She was absorbed in a process
of self-study that claimed all her mental energies. Stubbornly and
deeply she was questioning something, probing something, prying into
something. This something, though but a memory now, she endeavored to
recreate into a present reality. And in her tireless effort to make the
past live again in the present she sought an opportunity to reexamine
and reappraise her actions. Were they altogether right? What possible
effect did or will they have on her future? How was she to gain that
ease and tranquility of mind that seem to be the result as well as the
reward of making a right decision. Has her opportunity come and gone?
Will she ever have another? She did not know, and the less she knew the
more she thought and speculated on the subject.
Her mind dwelt continuously upon a scene that six months previously had
made a profound impression upon her. From the moment of its enactment
she had been in the grip of that mental self-absorption until it
began to affect her even outwardly so seriously that her parents had
willingly consented to her eastern trip.
Even now in the transoceanic air terminal for the first time, Mary’s
mind, unaffected by the sights that were novel to her, reverted to
the occasion that had persistently beset her. In her mind’s eye she
pictured for the hundredth time the incident with Joe Levanter that
was the direct cause of her present unplanned journey. Mary was uneasy
mentally. She was not sure that she hated Levanter, nor was she sure
that she loved him. Of one thing only was she certain, and that was she
could not be indifferent to the memory of their last meeting.
He was indeed a remarkable young man who had precipitated within her
strange, mixed feelings that she could not define. She remembered
the last call he made upon her at her home in Washington. Back upon
the screen of her memory there flashed again a moving picture which
portrayed every incident of that momentous evening. She saw herself
stroll out of the house with him across the porch to the rustic seat
back of the lawn. She again saw him go through the impassioned gestures
of his proposal, and her ears--deaf to the multitudinous noises around
her--again heard his words repeated from the indelible record impressed
upon her mind.
“Mary, if you will only say yes the world shall be yours and mine. I
have just done something wonderful that will bring me great fame, and I
want you to share it with me. Won’t you say the word that will make me
forever happy, dear?”
She again saw his coal black eyes peering straight at her with a
penetrating gaze, and the living intenseness stamped upon his face. She
saw herself held immovable by the equal strength of the opposing forces
that were battling within her. She saw herself transfixed in this pose
of painful indecision for what seemed to be eternity, until the sound
of his voice again broke through her reverie.
“Mary, I must have your answer now, this very minute, my life, my
future--everything depends upon it.”
Then as in a dream she heard herself repeat the momentous “No” that
escaped from her lips before she realized she had spoken. Why she had
said it she did not know then, and the constant introspection of the
past six months had failed to produce a reason. Was it the spontaneous
response of intuition?
Daily for six months she had reviewed the scene, and yet even now,
as on the day of its occurrence she gave an involuntary start as she
thought of the effect produced by her refusal. She again saw the quick
change that came over Levanter, the rage that suddenly lit up his olive
brown features and shone from his eyes. She again heard him as he spoke
with suppressed fury in his voice:
“Mary I love you. I still love you, but evidently to you my feeling
has been nothing but a pleasant diversion. You have played with it,
encouraged it. You have led me to believe that there was more than
hope for me. And now you coldly dash that hope to pieces, knowing full
well that it has been the moving principle of all my plans, of all my
efforts.... I don’t know what is going to happen to me. But I know one
thing. You cannot by a mere word detach yourself from the fate which
you and I have been preparing for ourselves. Whether with me or away
for me, you too shall bear the responsibility for my future as you bore
it for my past, and shall feel the effects of whatever is in store for
me.”
“Good bye, Mary, but don’t forget. I shall not.”
As Mary, still enthralled, saw with her mental eye the stalwart frame
leaping over the fence back of the lawn, she felt a tug at her arm.
Turning around she passed from the realm of memory to that of actuality
in the person of her mother who was exclaiming:
“Why, Mary, you haven’t touched your breakfast, dear. What are you
thinking of, child? Come now, we shall have to hurry, for the ship is
leaving in a few minutes.”
Almost automatically Mary began to eat impelled by duty rather than
appetite. She listened attentively while Fitzgerald with the fervor of
an expert was explaining everything about the station. His own branch
of aeronautics was concerned chiefly with the lighter than air types of
air vessels, and he was now in his very element, anxious to impart his
knowledge to his fair ward.
Breakfast over, the three walked from the restaurant to the elevator
and ascended with other passengers to the landing platform at the
top of the tower. There a steward took their baggage and escorted
them along the alleyway to their cabins. As soon as they had located
themselves Fitzgerald took them to the observation room, and secured
for them a favorable window seat where they could watch the departure
of the great airship.
The view unfolded before their enraptured gaze was unforgettable.
One thousand feet below they saw the glories of the island-strewn
San Francisco Bay. It was spread out beneath them like a map. They
saw its shores, and those of San Pablo Bay. They saw the magnificent
rivers Sacramento and San Joaquin emptying their streams into the
beautiful bay. A few miles to the north Mount Tamalpais towered above
them. On the hazy horizon of the Pacific they could just make out the
Farallones. Directly below, the hilly city appeared almost flat.
Meanwhile the airship was making ready to leave. The six engines were
now running slowly, but the propellors were locked in a horizontal
position. The captain, megaphone in hand, and his officers were on
the bridge waiting to give the signal to cast off. Friends of the
passengers were grouped about the balcony beneath the mooring globe,
waving flags and handkerchiefs.
Finally the agent of the line left the airship. The captain rang an
order to the engine room, and a moment later the changeable pitch
propellor on the after engine nacelle was thrown into reverse and
commenced to revolve slowly. Then through the megaphone the captain
shouted the order to the employes on the tower: “Let go!”
The engineer on the pier touched a button, and the electric machinery,
moving with swiftness and precision, released the clutch that held
the airship to the tower. The reversed propellor pulled the giant
frame clear of the tower before it could rise. A few moments later the
buoyancy of the helium gas had lifted it to an altitude of ten thousand
feet.
The watchers on the balcony saw the ship turn slowly in a circle, and
then with gathering speed swiftly float to the western horizon. As the
last farewell cheer died away the telephone bell in the main office
rang. A clerk reached leisurely over and lifted the receiver to his
ear. He uttered a languid “hello!” A voice came back immediately: “We
have a rush long distance call from Washington for Miss Mary Ingleton,
a passenger on the airship Wilbur Wright,” it said.
“Too late,” replied the clerk, “the ship has just gone.”
CHAPTER FOUR
When Joe Levanter left Mary’s home on the day of their final parting he
felt a sense of vacuous misery overpowering him. All at once he became
aware of the fact that he had no one to turn to, no one to care or live
for. All his dreams, his youth, his past full of ardor and promise
had been swept away from him, it seemed, by the single movement of a
woman’s arm. What this arm had meant to him as a sustaining prop for
his ambitions he realized only now, when a sort of dull, flat weakness
filled his frame.
He entered his comfortably furnished apartment in one of the
fashionable homes of the capital and threw himself on a sofa, burying
his head in the cushion, as if wishing to escape the dark and crushing
force of his depression.
For the first time in his life he faced existence without a set
purpose, without energy, without zest. He was a brilliant aeronautical
engineer, the inventor of many remarkable devices which revolutionized
the construction of airplanes. He was a daring pilot. He was also
engaged in conducting experiments with a new type of air vessel of
his own invention which was considered of utmost importance by the
United States government in whose employ he was. He was internationally
known as one of the most original and successful builders of airships.
His name was uttered with respect by scientists in every country,
and the whole aeronautical world expected further and even more
splendid achievements of him. He was genuinely loved and admired by
his colleagues, while to those who were assigned to assist him in his
laboratory work and field tests he was an ideal superior and companion
at the same time. But all this work and glory, all this popularity,
these personal and social triumphs brought him no consolation in this
hour of anguish, so keen, so humiliating.
There was his fame of course. But of late it had become a source of
embarrassment to him that was as unusual as it was unwarranted. For
some time he had been the recipient of letters from unknown people
residing in various parts of Europe and South America, who professed
a great interest in the work he was doing. In a subtle but persistent
manner these people hinted that with his genius and courage he could
make his work the foundation of a material prosperity far greater
than he could possibly achieve as a mere government employee. The
letters came at regular intervals and bore the seals of apparently
well situated and even noble personages. The last letter he received
contained a request for a personal interview to discuss a matter,
which the writer was certain would prove of interest to Levanter and
might rebound to the advantage of all parties concerned. Levanter was
informed that unless he definitely made known his unwillingness to see
the party seeking an audience with him, the latter would call at his
residence where it was hoped there would be laid the beginning of what
was certain to prove an amicable as well as profitable association.
This, by some strange association, flashed in his mind as he lay a prey
to disillusion and despondency. Helpless protest stirred somewhere
between the intermittent gleams of conscious self-analysis. Defiance
and hatred occasionally welled up within his breast. But the confusion
and intensity of the reactions made Levanter feel only more dejected,
and with listless resignation he abandoned himself to the tortures of
his soul.
As he thus lay and grappled with the shadows of despair the door bell
rang. Being alone in the house, he was forced to get up and open the
door. A tall man, immaculately dressed, asked if Mr. Levanter was at
home and whether he could be seen alone. When the latter introduced
himself as the gentleman in question, the stranger was visibly affected
and, making a low bow, said he was Monsieur de Ribaud of Marseilles who
had asked for the interview. Levanter invited him in.
After a short pause the visitor said:
“I have come here on an important mission. I represent an international
group of investors who are anxious to secure your cooperation and
guidance in a very profitable undertaking.”
“What is it?” Levanter asked.
The visitor looked at Levanter intently for some time, then answered:
“It is something that will demand the greatest courage and grit. But
we know you have that. Mr. Levanter, have you ever thought of the
tremendous riches that is now being carried in airships across seas and
continents and oceans? It is a booty worthy of the bravest.”
Levanter, astonished, made no reply.
“You are a genius, Mr. Levanter, and genius knows no law. Can you be
satisfied with the paltry offering of the mediocre whom you yourself
teach how to be rich and powerful, when you yourself have it in your
power to command all...? Why should you live this life of small reward
and duty, when you can make a whole world your own? You are the master
of the air. There is no one to dispute your supremacy. Your knowledge
and skill have built and operated marvelous machines for others, why
not use your abilities for yourself? We propose to pay you your own
price for the invention you are now working on. We offer you all the
money you want for the construction of airplanes for our operations.
And we invite you to become the head of our organization which has
every chance of success on its side. Are these terms fair enough? I
shall not press you for a decision right now. Whenever you are ready
let me know at the following address (offering his card) and we shall
have no trouble arranging the details.... Meanwhile we must part. Good
bye, Mr. Levanter. We hope to hear from you.”
Monsieur de Ribaud rose and left. Levanter remained sitting in the same
position, dazed by the offer and its prospects.
He sat thus all evening and through a long and dreary night. He thought
of his eventful past and of his contemplated future. He thought of
the woman whose lovely face seemed to link the two, only to mock and
torment him and to deprive him of both. He thought of fleeing and
secluding himself somewhere. He thought of death, of revenge, of
tremendous hazards and overwhelming sacrifices. He thought of all those
things that seeth and boil in the heart of a rejected lover.
Then out of the black denseness of his thoughts there floated up the
dim but piercing flicker of the offer he had been made. To his desolate
soul it shone like a dull-red, turbid smudge of light and hope....
It warmed and caressed and beckoned. It promised peace, revenge,
forgetfulness and fortune....
It made that answer for Levanter for which de Ribaud so very tactfully
had refused to press.
CHAPTER FIVE
Five hundred miles from San Francisco, high over the vast expanse of
the trackless Pacific Ocean, the airship Wilbur Wright was tearing
through space. All of her six engines were running smoothly and
sweetly, each turning out the power of two thousand horses, sending
the huge airship forward at an average speed of one hundred and twenty
miles an hour.
In the navigating cabin, built into the keel and streamlined to the
forward end of the envelope, Captain Johnstone and his officers were
engaged in “shooting the sun” for latitude. On the forward lookout
post, atop the envelope 90 feet higher up, stood Howard Redmond, the
second officer, sextant glued to his eye, engaged in the same task.
The passengers were spread about the ship, some taking their morning
walk along the 1,000 foot promenade deck built on top of the envelope.
Some were in the smoking-room playing cards, or getting up a pool on
the day’s run. Others were in the observation saloon, lying recumbent
in comfortable lounging chairs.
Upon the after end of the promenade deck, seated in long deck chairs
were Commander Fitzgerald and Mary Ingleton. They had gone there
immediately after breakfast, which was served two hours after the
airship had left San Francisco. Mrs. Ingleton was still in her cabin
below. For some time the naval officer and his companion sat watching
for a glimpse of the placid ocean through the occasional rifts which
split the rolling clouds below the airship. The clouds themselves
presented a remarkable sight as the brilliant sun played upon their
rounded billows and gave them the appearance of gigantic puffs of
snow-white cotton. Beneath these fleecy billows a tropical rain-storm
was in progress, but in the sea of air through which the Wilbur Wright
was speeding all was calm and serene, with not a single speck of cloud
above to mar the perfect contour of the sky-blue vaulted heavens.
Neither Fitzgerald nor his companion had spoken since they sat down.
Mary was in raptures over the scene unfolded below her. Fitzgerald was
plainly nervous. His unusually steady hands were shaking perceptibly,
and he was constantly shifting uneasily in his chair. This became so
noticeable at last that Mary turned to him and asked:
“Don’t you feel well, Commander?”
“Why do you ask that?” parried Fitzgerald.
Mary paused a moment and then replied:
“Well from your manner you don’t appear well. In fact you look quite
worried.”
“I’ve just been thinking about something,” answered Fitzgerald, “and
trying to make up my mind what to do.”
“Oh! do tell me,” exclaimed Mary, “maybe I can help you.”
Fitzgerald suddenly sat up in his chair with an eager look in his
eyes. Mary’s remark had brought more animation to his face than he had
exhibited at any time since they had boarded the airship.
“You can help me, Miss Ingleton,” he said eagerly; then after a
moment’s reflection, he continued in a more dejected tone, “but I don’t
know whether you would be willing to.”
“How strange you are, Commander. What makes you think that I wouldn’t
help you if I could?”
“Well I know you could help me in this case, but it is something of
such vital importance that I hesitate to ask you for fear you would
refuse.”
Mary looked up at him, and in a short quick glance her intuition
divined the cause of Fitzgerald’s agitation and his cryptic remarks.
She quickly lowered her eyes as a warm blush suffused her cheeks.
Then with true womanly instinct she promptly attempted to change the
embarrassing subject by exclaiming:
“Oh! look Commander, there’s a break in the clouds. You can see the
ocean now. Isn’t it wonderful?”
“Yes it is,” replied Fitzgerald, “but to me it isn’t nearly as
wonderful as you are--Mary!”
He lingered longingly over her name, the first time he had used it in
her presence. Again Mary blushed, and then in her confusion she said in
whispering tones:
“Don’t, please don’t, or I will have to leave you.”
“You can’t,” exclaimed Fitzgerald, as he suddenly leaned over and
grasped her hands. Then before she could make any move he continued in
impassioned tones, “No! you can’t leave me until you have heard what is
in my heart Mary. I love you Mary! I love you with all my soul. I have
tried hard to tell you Mary, but I could never gather up sufficient
courage. It is hard for me to tell you now. I am just a plain man. I am
not gifted with speech, but even if I were there are no words in any
language that could describe my feelings toward you, Mary. I have loved
you since the first time I saw you, with a love that has grown from day
to day. You are more than all the world to me. I want to be with you
always. I watch for you every moment, Mary. I am unhappy and lonesome
when you are not with me. Mary, won’t you be my wife?”
The unusual fervor that gripped Fitzgerald and spurred him to unwonted
eloquence kept him keyed up while he waited anxiously and impatiently
for Mary to reply. He devoured her with his eyes, as with downcast
head, she nervously twisted her hands within her lap. Thus she sat
for several minutes trying hard to find a way to deal with the new
and unexpected situation. She had never dreamed that Fitzgerald was
in love with her. The excitement of the voyage, and the constant
retrospection upon the incident with Levanter had kept her in a state
of oblivion to the persons about her. In a way she had acted toward
them as though they were necessary parts of her surroundings, and she
had not given them a moment’s thought, nor paid any attention to their
whims or moods. Therefore the proposal of Fitzgerald came to her like
a thunderbolt out of a clear sky. She was completely non-plussed by it
and at a loss as to what to say.
She knew she did not love him. In fact so far as her feelings were
concerned she had in an abstract way looked upon him as one commanding
her filial respect. The thought as a possible lover had certainly never
entered her head. As she mused, Fitzgerald’s impatience gained mastery
over him, and Mary was suddenly awakened from the reverie his proposal
had plunged her into, by his exclamation:
“Mary dear, can’t you say something.”
“Really I don’t know,” she blurted out, “I don’t know what to say. It
would be silly to say it was so unexpected, but honestly you took me by
surprise. I have never thought of you as a lover, Commander, really I
haven’t, so I cannot give you an answer unless it be, ‘No.’”
“No, don’t say that,” pleaded Fitzgerald, “don’t say that! I am willing
to wait. I do love you, Mary, and nothing that ever happens can change
the feeling. I am yours only and always. I am willing to do anything
you say dear, but can’t you give me some little encouragement?”
Mary suddenly assumed an air of dignity that seemed strange in one so
young.
“Listen Commander,” she said, “haven’t you wondered why I am making
this trip at this time of the year? I will tell you.”
She then told the story of her experience with Levanter, leaving out no
detail of her own perturbation.
“So you see Commander,” she continued, “I am not yet myself. I don’t
know just what to say to you. I want to say ‘No,’ but I like you very
much. As matters stand now I can’t give you any encouragement, it would
not be right. Let us be friends, but please, please do not ask me
again.”
“Very well, Mary,” said Fitzgerald, “I will wait gladly under those
circumstances. Maybe you will change your liking into love. I will
certainly do all I can to bring that about. I hope so with all my
heart. I will obey your command, for this voyage anyway, but I am going
to ask you again dear, when I think the time has arrived.”
While this scene was being enacted unobserved upon the after end of the
ship, another incident was occurring in another part of the ship. In
the wireless cabin just abaft the navigating room, Herbert Alexander,
the wireless operator, sat with his legs upon the instrument table,
the receivers fastened to his ears, and a novel in his hands. He read
as he listened for stray calls and smoked with ease, at peace with all
the world, dreaming between paragraphs of the Geisha girl in Yokohama
waiting to entertain him at the end of the flight.
Presently, with a bored expression on his face, he dropped the book
and leisurely withdrew his legs from the table. His sensitive ears had
responded to the call, WWR. WWR. WWR., of his ship. The calling station
signed San Francisco.
With a patience born of experience he waited until the operator at San
Francisco finished, then grasping the sending key, he answered the call
and gave the signal to go ahead. Taking one of the telegraph blanks he
wrote down:
“Be on your guard. Air pirate again operating.” This was followed by a
brief description of the attack on the Langley.
The news of the threatening danger spread like wildfire among the
passengers. Their moods immediately changed. Upon their countenances
appeared the shadows of deep thought, the furrows of deep anxiety and
fear. All grew quiet and expectant.
In a corner of the salon, apart from the rest stood Wing Commander
Kenneth Fitzgerald, with Mrs. Ingleton and Mary. Mrs. Ingleton was
very perturbed, but not so Mary. She was obviously pleased with the
situation, for she evinced a greater interest in it than she had shown
for months.
“Just think,” she said joyously to Fitzgerald, “that we might get
an honest to goodness adventure. Isn’t it thrilling? The girls in
Washington will be terribly envious when they read about it. Oh! I
do hope the old pirate shows up. I’ll be terribly disappointed if he
doesn’t. Isn’t it terribly exciting?”
CHAPTER SIX
Throughout the night the Wilbur Wright had steadily forged ahead.
The crew had willingly volunteered to two watches instead of three,
consequently a more rigid lookout had been maintained at all points of
the ship. The course lay a little more than ten degrees south of the
Tropic of Cancer.
The night had been well illuminated with a starry heaven, such as
one sees only in tropical regions, but to the anxious watchers it
had been passing slowly. Now at six o’clock dawn was emerging with
tropical swiftness, to replace the star punched blackness of the sky.
The airship was rapidly approaching the southern end of the Hawaiian
archipelago.
An hour afterward Captain Johnstone came into the navigating cabin. A
few minutes later the towering crater of Mauna Loa, the volcanic mass
of the Island of Hawaii, appeared on the northwestern horizon like a
dim cloud specking the clear sky about them. It was fully three hundred
miles away. Howard Redmond, the second officer, who was on watch at the
time, pointed it out to the commander in the usual terse manner of the
navigator.
Captain Johnstone looked at it in an abstract manner, while in his mind
he went over the events of the previous day. There to the northwest,
a few hours flying distance, lay Honolulu. Not a single aircraft was
in sight, although undoubtedly government ships were patrolling in the
vicinity of the Hawaiian capital. He had already made his decision to
continue flying on the more southerly course direct to Manila without
stopping at Honolulu, but now the actual sight of Hawaii without any
sign of the pirate had put the situation in an entirely new light.
There seemed to be no question that he could make Honolulu safely,
particularly with government craft undoubtedly but a short distance
away. Then too, if necessary, he could leave for Manila at a different
time from that given in the schedule, and make arrangements to keep his
departure secret.
After considering these points for some time Captain Johnstone suddenly
made up his mind to depart from his original plan and go to Honolulu.
Accordingly he gave orders to bring the airship about, and place her on
the new course. After seeing these commands obeyed, he went into his
cabin and rang for his breakfast.
Half an hour later the lookout man at the observation post on top
of the envelope shouted down through the loud speaking telephone:
“There’s a ship three points off the port bow, Sir, very high.”
Redmond rushed over to the port window in the navigating cabin and
searched the sky. Finally he made out a tiny speck at an almost
unbelievable altitude. For a few seconds he watched it, and then
decided that its general appearance and position were sufficiently
suspicious to warrant action. He sent a boy to call Captain Johnstone
from his room. The latter who had just finished his breakfast, hurried
to the navigating room, where Redmond told him of the strange craft
that had just been sighted.
Captain Johnstone picked up his glasses and pointed them to the distant
object in the skies. He watched it as it swept along in apparent
circuitious course at tremendous speed. At this time the Wilbur Wright
was flying at an altitude of 15,000 feet. He next picked up a pair
of altitude finders and trained them upon the stranger. After an
observation lasting several seconds, he turned round to Redmond and
said:
“My God; it’s fully 45,000 feet above the sea! It must be a very
unusual craft to keep that altitude. It may be the pirate. Anyway I’m
not going to take any chances with it. We’re pretty close to Honolulu
now, and even if it is the pirate we ought to make the airport safely.
Please send for Mr. Alexander.”
The captain then picked up his field glasses again and continued to
watch the stranger through them. Shortly afterwards the wireless
operator appeared in response to the captain’s call. At this very
moment the captain observed the stranger in the skies turn around and
then begin a wide spiral dive. All hesitation disappeared from his
mind. Throwing down the glasses, he picked up a piece of paper and
began to write:
“Captain Smith, Naval Commander Honolulu.
“Wilbur Wright in Latitude 15.20 N. Longitude 152.35 E. Strange craft
approximate altitude 45,000 feet now spiralling toward us. Believe it
to be pirate airplane. Please rush assistance. Johnstone.”
Turning to the waiting wireless operator, he thrust the message in his
hand and said:
“Please get that off immediately, Mr. Alexander.”
Then he rang for the chief steward and at the same time ordered the
bugler to sound the alarm. Even before the steward started for the
navigating cabin, the thoroughly alarmed passengers began to troop
into the dining room. As soon as the former had reported to Captain
Johnstone he was told to have the stewards make a search of the
passengers’ quarters to see that all the passengers were in the dining
room.
“When they are all in the dining salon,” continued the Captain, “tell
them that we have sighted a suspicious craft, and that I thought it
best they should remain in the salon until further orders. Tell them
we are only 400 miles from Honolulu, and that I have wirelessed for
assistance, and that I do not think there is any danger.”
The steward left to go about his task. In the wireless room Alexander
had just got into communication with Honolulu and had started to send
the captain’s message.
By this time the passengers were in the dining salon. They were talking
to each other in excited tones in groups at the various tables, when
the chief steward arrived and delivered the captain’s message.
At the captain’s table in the center of the salon sat Commander
Fitzgerald with Mrs. Ingleton and her daughter. They had been in the
dining room when the warning bugle was sounded. Mrs. Ingleton, being
somewhat nervous, was almost terror-stricken, and Fitzgerald was doing
his best to allay her fears. Mary however, was alive with intense
excitement. She could hardly restrain herself from clapping her hands
over the prospect of the adventure. “Oh! isn’t it thrilling!” she
exclaimed.
Just then one of the passengers at a window on the port side shouted
across the room:
“He’s getting very close to us. He’s coming very fast. Just look at
him!”
The passengers who had remained seated started excitedly for the
windows. Before they could reach them there was the sound of an
explosion followed by a sizzling, ripping sound, and the ship shook
from stem to stern.
CHAPTER SEVEN
An air of anxiety hung over the United States Naval Station at Pearl
Harbor on the Island of Oahu, six miles west of Honolulu. In the
office of the commandant sat Captain James H. Smith, an expression of
deep concern spread over his weather-beaten face. Seated with him and
sharing his gloomy thoughts was Air Commander Heathcote, commander of
the aerial forces using the Hawaiian archipelago as their basis.
Both had just been discussing the airship Wilbur Wright which was now
several hours overdue. Not a single word had been received from her.
The fate of the Langley, only a few hours previously, was freshly
engraven on their memories. In fact the passengers were still aboard
the tramp steamer Yang-Tsze, which was ploughing its lubberly way
toward Manila. Now there loomed up the possibility that the Wilbur
Wright had shared the same fate.
Both officers had dispatched every craft that was available under their
command to search the seas and the air, in accordance with orders from
Washington. All were in immediate wireless intercommunication with each
other, but none had sighted or heard from the overdue airship.
Thus they sat and discussed the possibilities of the situation while
waiting impotently for information. Presently a messenger came in from
the naval radio station with a penciled note from the operator. It
stated that a distress signal had been received from the Wilbur Wright,
but that the operator had been unable to receive it completely owing
to interference from another station, that was working on the same
wavelength as the Wilbur Wright.
Captain Smith showed the note to Heathcote, and the two men immediately
walked over to the wireless station. There the operator was frantically
endeavoring to get into touch with the Wilbur Wright. Upon the entrance
of the two commanders, the operator ceased his efforts long enough to
advise them of what had occurred.
“I heard an S.O.S. call, Sir,” he said, “and it was signed by the
Wilbur Wright. The interference made it impossible to get the message,
but I got parts of it. I have been trying to get the Wilbur Wright
again, but now I don’t receive any answer at all, and the other
station has also stopped sending. I sent out a general call too, in
the hope that the nearby craft might answer in case the Wilbur Wright
didn’t, but there’s no reply. Here’s what I managed to get through the
interference.”
The operator handed Captain Smith a slip of paper on which was written
parts of a message, just as they had been received by the operator, as
follows:
“Captain Smith ** *** ** Honol * Wilbu * Wright *** itude 15.2 ** 52.35
** craft believe ***** pirate ***”
“That’s all I could get, Sir,” added the operator “and it’s just as it
came in.”
Captain Smith and Commander Heathcote both pored over the fragmentary
message intently for several seconds. Then the former said:
“It looks as though he were being attacked by the pirate and was trying
to tell us. Those figures are undoubtedly his position.”
“Yes,” said Heathcote, “that’s probably the case. The first of those
figures is most likely to be his latitude, and the other his longitude.
There must be a figure missing though. It’s probably 15.2 N. and 152.35
E. It wouldn’t be a bad idea to send out some patrol craft in that
general direction. I’ll order my outfit to proceed there immediately.
It may be that the station interfereing was the pirate himself.”
Turning to the operator Commodore Heathcote asked whether any of the
aircraft, or the naval vessels had received the call from the airship.
“I imagine they did, Sir,” replied the former, “but as soon as the call
came in I told everybody to keep off while I took the message. They
would probably listen in too, and take the message down, but I don’t
think they got anything more than I did. I didn’t bother to ask them,
because I have been busy trying to raise the Wilbur Wright ever since.
If you want me to I’ll ask them now.”
“You might as well,” said the Commodore, “and then when you get the
flagships I’ll give you a message to send to the commanders.”
The operator proceeded to send out a general call, and shortly
afterwards received replies from the flagships of the naval unit
and the aircraft squadron. He asked both of them whether they had
received the message from the Wilbur Wright, and after a brief wireless
communication learned they had received no more than he.
While the operator was calling the patrol craft, the two commanders had
picked up a chart and pin-pointed the position given in the message.
“It’s about four hundred miles from here,” said Heathcote. We could
probably get out there as soon as any of the ships on patrol duty.
The big P. Q. flying boat is the fastest thing around here. It’s
practically ready to take off any minute. I’m going out in her, do you
want to come along?”
“You bet,” replied Captain Smith, glad to be active, and greatly
relieved that some of the uncertainty had passed.
Heathcote turned over a message he had hurriedly written to the
wireless operator and ordered him to send it immediately to the
commander of the patrol aircraft. It advised the commander to proceed
to the position given with all possible speed, and make a careful
search within a radius of one hundred miles, and also to listen
carefully for any wireless messages from the Wilbur Wright.
The two officers then went out to the seaplane landing beach, and
gave orders to the handling crew to get the P-Q flying boat ready.
This was quickly obeyed, and ten minutes later the big aircraft had
risen gracefully from the smooth waters of the harbor and was circling
rapidly to an altitude of five thousand feet. As soon as this height
was attained, the ship was straightened out and placed on a direct
course to the position given in the message from the Wilbur Wright.
Swiftly it passed over the mountainous archipelago, skirting the lofty
peaks of the volcanoes.
Two hours later the look-out man in the forward gun nest shouted back
through the inter-communicating telephone: “There are some small
objects in the water, Sir. I can’t make out what they are.”
Commodore Heathcote took his glasses and looked down, and then ordered
his pilot to make a landing near them. He also swept the skies in
search of other aircraft. In the distance the war planes that had been
on patrol duty were coming up at rapid speed. Heathcote ordered the
wireless operator of the P-Q to tell them he was going to land and
request them to circle around the vicinity until further orders.
The pilot of the P-Q threw over the wheel control and pushed the rudder
bar with his feet. The big flying boat nosed over and down, then
went into a swift spiral dive. In rapid corkscrew movements it swept
down through the air five thousand feet in sixty seconds, and then
straightened out fifty feet above the surface of the sea. Two seconds
later it was skimming over the smooth surface less than a hundred feet
from the nearest boat.
All doubt as to the nature of the objects in the water had now
vanished. There were six lifeboats, and they were from the airship
Wilbur Wright. As the flying boat taxied over towards them the
passengers let loose a rousing cheer and waved a welcome to their
rescuers. Through his glasses Commodore Heathcote made out the
uniformed figure of Captain Johnstone in the leading lifeboat. He told
his pilot to taxi over toward it. A few moments later the P-Q drew up
alongside.
“What happened, Captain?” shouted Commodore Heathcote.
“We were shot down by an airplane,” replied the airship commander, “we
have a lady passenger in serious condition and in need of immediate
hospital attention. It is Mrs. Ingleton, Secretary of the Navy’s wife.
Have you got any machine that would take her to Honolulu quickly? She
is in a critical condition. As soon as you take her off I’ll come over
and tell you what happened.”
CHAPTER EIGHT
One of the patrol airplanes, in response to an order from Commodore
Heathcote, came down and landed near the lifeboats, and transferred
Mrs. Ingleton from the captain’s boat. It then took off and started for
Honolulu at high speed.
As soon as this operation had been completed, Captain Johnstone was
taken off his lifeboat, aboard the P-Q, flying boat, where he was
received in the after gunpit by the two government commanders. “I have
wirelessed for a couple of destroyers to come along here and pick
up the passengers and crew, Captain,” said Captain Smith. “It will
take them a few hours to get here, and we will stand by you till they
arrive. Tell us how it happened.”
Captain Johnstone narrated the story of the second act of aerial piracy
that was destined within a few hours to shock the world into frenzied
action.
“We had been fully warned about the Langley,” he began, “so I put the
ship a hundred miles off her course. At first I decided to fly to
Manila without a stop, but when we fetched up with Hawaii without any
sign of the pirate I changed my mind and decided to make Honolulu.
“I’d scarcely changed my course when the lookout man observed a strange
craft at tremendous altitude. After an observation I figured it must
have been at least 45,000 feet up, and it was moving rapidly in
circles. Suddenly it commenced to spiral down toward us, and I decided
it was no time to take chances, and I ordered my wireless operator to
send out an S.O.S.
“The stranger came down on us with terrific speed. He didn’t make a
sound, with the exception of the hum of his propeller. He soon reached
our level and circled around us. Then he fired a shot straight at us.
It went clean through the middle of the envelope. I gave orders to nose
down and land, but it was useless. The pirate was doing some great
shooting, and he soon had us disabled.
“We settled quickly and he came down after us. As soon as we had landed
I had the boats out, and started putting the women in them. When we had
done this he came up alongside. A man leaned out of the window in the
body and shouted through a megaphone.
“‘You’ve got a Miss Mary Ingleton of Washington on board. Where is
she?’”
“As soon as he had asked this question another man stood up in a small
cockpit in the bows and fingered the trigger of a machine gun fixed
there. He looked as though he meant business. I hesitated a few moments
and tried to evade his question, but he shouted back:
“‘I know she’s on board. Tell her to come right here, I want to speak
to her. I’m not going to stand any nonsense. If she’s not here in five
minutes, you will be placing all your passengers in danger. It’s up to
you.’
“Miss Ingleton was in my boat with her mother and Commodore Fitzgerald,
and she heard what the stranger had said. Mrs. Ingleton immediately
became hysterical and pleaded with me not to let her daughter go.
Fitzgerald was also against it, as he was quite sure the pirate would
not have the heart to endanger defenseless people. ‘All we’ve got to do
is to stand firm against him, and he’ll weaken,’ he told me.
“I was in a terrible dilemma. Naturally I didn’t want to let Miss
Ingleton go over to the pirate, and I didn’t want to jeopardize the
rest of the passengers. We could only see the two men on the strange
airplane. They wore heavy flying clothes and had chamois masks over
their faces. I imagine that was for the high altitudes they were
flying, as well as for the purpose of disguise. While I was trying to
figure a way out, Miss Ingleton got up and said:
“‘Let’s row over there, Captain. It won’t do any harm to talk to him
and find out what he wants.’
“I gave the order and my crew pulled away until we came within a few
feet of the airplane. As we drew up the fellow in the cabin leaned out
and asked:
“‘Have you got Miss Ingleton on board that boat. Where is she?’
“Before I could answer Miss Ingleton stood up and said:
“‘Here I am, what do you want?’
“‘We want you to come on board here,’ he replied. ‘If you do so we will
let the rest of the passengers alone. If you don’t come willingly we’ll
be compelled to use force.’
“To this Miss Ingleton answered: ‘I’ve got my mother with me, can she
come too?’
“‘No, we only want you,’ the fellow replied.
“Mrs. Ingleton began to cry hysterically. ‘Don’t go Mary, don’t go,
I’m afraid.’ Her daughter spoke to her soothingly a few minutes and
tried to console her. Miss Ingleton was not in the least afraid and was
acting very calmly. I overheard her say to her mother: ‘I can take care
of myself, mother dear, don’t worry, you don’t want to make all these
other poor people suffer, do you. We can’t stop this man from doing
what he wants. If I don’t go willingly he can get me by force. I don’t
know what he wants, but he will probably let me come right back again.’
“After a little more pleading Miss Ingleton stood up again and shouted
over to the man in the airplane: ‘Alright, I’ll come over now.’
“I went to her, and said: ‘It’s funny that he should know that you were
on board. Do you recognize his voice.’ She said that as far as she knew
it was the first time she had heard it. It was quite strange to her
and she did not recognize it at all. I was trying to get a clue to the
man’s identity by asking her that question, but she couldn’t help me.
“When we came up alongside, the fellow stood in the doorway of the
cabin and assisted Miss Ingleton on board. While he was doing this the
other man in the gun cockpit stood over us with a revolver in his hand.
As soon as Miss Ingleton was on board the airplane the fellow in the
doorway ordered us to shove off and lay clear. I tried to look into
the small doorway while we were alongside, but he stood so full in the
small aperture that it was impossible to see anything.
“As soon as we fell away the cabin door was closed, and the airplane
started over to where the Wilbur Wright was lying awash in the water.
He evidently had a marine screw for use on the water, as his propellers
were not working. I saw some of the crew go aboard the disabled
airship. There seemed to be five of them. Whether any remained I don’t
know. They were there for upwards of twenty minutes, and during that
time one of them was engaged in passing most of the valuable cargo from
the airship to the airplane. Then they all got aboard the airplane
again and taxied away about a hundred yards. From that position they
opened fire on the Wilbur Wright and continued firing until she sank.
“Suddenly the propellers of the airplane began to whirl around, and in
a few seconds she was in the air. She climbed with incredible speed and
disappeared in no time. We could not hear any motor sound at all, and
there was apparently no room for the motors where the propellers were
housed. The propellers must have been connected to the motors by means
of gears.
“As soon as the airplane disappeared Mrs. Ingleton collapsed
completely. She had been buoyed up by the hope that her daughter would
come back, but now that the pirate had left without hesitation she was
heartbroken. We tried our best to console and revive her, but it was of
no avail.
“After the pirate had disappeared I made the rounds of the boats to
find whether all my passengers and crew were safe. In the hurry we had
not had time to make a roll call. The round showed all the passengers
were safely on board with the exception of Miss Ingleton. All the
crew were also on board, except the second officer Howard Redmond,
who is missing. I made inquiries, but no one seems to have seen him
anywhere on the ship. I am afraid he is lost. I can’t account for his
disappearance. He must have got tangled up somewhere in the ship and
gone down with her.”
CHAPTER NINE
The sinking of the airship Wilbur Wright by the unknown aerial pirate,
coming as it did twenty four hours after the airship Langley had been
shot down, shocked the entire world, and caused a wave of anxiety to
surge through every civilized country. “Where will he strike next?” was
the thought on every mind.
Its immediate effect was the wholesale cancellation of all commercial
air transport schedules along the Pacific railways, completely
isolating Australia and the Orient from rapid communication with the
rest of the world.
This was followed by a universal demand that the pirate be tracked down
and brought to justice. Throughout the North American continent there
was an insistent demand by every newspaper for immediate action in
running down the menace.
The question was immediately brought up before the executive committee
of the League of Nations, but at the request of the American member it
was decided to allow the United States Government to patrol the airways
and apprehend the pirate, particularly as only American ships had been
attacked thus far.
The news of the Wilbur Wright attack brought the utmost consternation
to official Washington. To the Secretary of the Navy it brought the
added fear for his daughter’s safety and anxiety over the seriousness
of his wife’s condition. With his daughter actually in the power of the
unknown pirate, he was fearful lest harm should come to her when the
forces of the government bore down upon the outlaw.
This fear weighed so heavily upon him that he gave expression to it at
the cabinet meeting which was called at once by the President to plan
the campaign against the pirate. As soon as the meeting was called to
order Secretary Ingleton arose and addressing the President, gave voice
to his fears and concluded by saying: “Therefore Mr. President I desire
to be excused from taking any part in formulating the plans that will
be devised to run down this man, because I feel my judgement might be
influenced by fears for my daughter’s safety. I will, however, pledge
myself to carry out as far as possible, wherever my department is
concerned, any plans that my colleagues may decide upon.”
The President and the other members of the cabinet expressed their
sympathy with the Secretary of the Navy and assured him that in the
plans laid down every possible precaution would be taken to insure the
safety of his daughter.
Then George Cowl, Secretary of Air, arose and read an official cipher
cablegram he had received from Commodore Heathcote describing the
attack on the Wilbur Wright in detail.
“You will see,” he said, after reading the cablegram, “that its details
coincide exactly with those of the attack on the Langley. The methods
adopted in both cases are practically identical, except of course for
the abduction of Miss Ingleton. In fact to me there seems to be no
possibility of any doubt as to the pirate being the same in both cases.
The chances of there being two pirates operating in that vicinity are
extremely remote.
“In laying our plans to hunt him down there is one important point to
bear in mind. He cannot operate without a base. He must have a base to
replenish his fuel, food and execute whatever repairs are necessary to
his machine after each flight.
“It seems to me that our first task is to locate this base. It must be
on one of the Islands in the mid-Pacific groups. Another problem which
we must solve is this: What is his method of keeping his base supplied
with the necessary stores?
“These are two very important points, and I think it would be wise
to investigate whether any coast vessels have been carrying cargoes
necessary to airplane maintenance, and whether they have been destined
to unusual places. It would also be a good plan to make inquiries at
all aircraft factories to ascertain whether they had by any chance
constructed the machine used by the pirate. Even from the meagre
description we have of the machine one gathers that its design is quite
out of the ordinary, and should be easy to trace if it was constructed
by any ordinary manufacturer.
“The next thing in my opinion would be to issue explicit instructions
to all the naval radio operators in the Pacific. The incident yesterday
when the pirate shot down the Wilbur Wright and then inquired for Miss
Ingleton shows that he must be equipped with wireless, because there is
no other way in which he could have known she was on board.
“The fact that he has wireless on board and uses it is borne out by
what occurred when the Wilbur Wright sent out an S.O.S. call. The
operator at Pearl Harbor was unable to get the complete message because
of interference, which, judging from all the facts in the case, could
have come from no one else except the pirate.
“Under these circumstances I would suggest that a description of his
signals be obtained from the Pearl Harbor station operator and sent out
by rush cable to all the other operators with instructions to listen
for them at all times.
“Then I would also suggest that the operators at Pearl Harbor, Guam and
Manila be instructed to adjust their Direction Finder apparatus on the
pirate immediately they hear him, and get a bearing on him. In this
way we might possibly be able to trace him to the base. We could also
arrange a new code for the operators to use in transmitting the results
of their Direction Finding bearings. This code should also be rushed
to them by cable, with the request that they repeat it back to us, so
that there will be no chance of any error.
“So much for that phase. We must now lay plans for tracking him down
with patrols. In my opinion we must proceed with this on well organized
lines, and should use both naval and aircraft units. The latter should
be fast scouts with long cruising range. Dirigibles are too slow for
this work, I think, and too vulnerable against this man. We must
arrange a complete co-ordination between the wireless and the patrol
units, and the latter should be advised of all codes.
“In this connection I have just received an interesting cable from
Commander Fitzgerald who was a passenger on the Wilbur Wright. Here it
is. He says:
“‘Respectfully request that I be given opportunity of leading any
expedition against airplane which shot down airships. As Miss Ingleton
was under my escort I feel it a personal duty to see no harm comes to
her and that she be safely restored to her parents. I am anxious to go
after the pirate, and strongly urge my request be granted.’
“Now Fitzgerald had ample opportunity of getting a comprehensive idea
of the attacking airplane, and he observed it both on the water and
in the air. Therefore he is the logical man for the job. Moreover,
he undoubtedly feels he has been remiss in the pledge to look after
Mrs. Ingleton and her daughter and seeks to atone, although personally
I do not think there is anything else he could have done under
the circumstances. I propose putting him in command of the pursuit
forces and having Commodore Heathcote at Honolulu in charge of base
operations. I think that Honolulu would be the best place to base the
expedition because of its central location to the apparent field of the
pirate’s operations.
“I think that we should have at least twelve squadrons of pursuit
airplanes for the task, and while they should be based on Honolulu for
repairs and refitting, I am in favor of having each squadron located at
some particular island so that it can be concentrated rapidly at any
particular spot the pirate is reported in.
“The task of running down the pirate should be carried out by a double
arrangement, first a daily patrol and second a special concentrated
patrol. In the first case I would suggest that the squadrons be located
on islands approximately five hundred miles apart and that each
squadron be assigned to patrol a definite territory of approximately
five hundred miles square. This could be done each day with four
airplanes, leaving each squadron with fourteen machines in reserve for
emergency.
“The patrolling airplanes would keep in constant wireless communication
with their squadron headquarters, and all the squadron headquarters
should be linked together by wireless or cable. The airplanes held in
reserve by each squadron will be kept in readiness at all times, and
in the event of a patrol airplane sighting the pirate, the reserve
machines will concentrate on the spot as soon as possible, after
receiving the wireless report. It would also be well to determine
the types of naval vessels to use, and the manner in which they can
co-operate with the aircraft.
“Those are my views gentlemen, but I am willing and anxious to
co-operate in any other plan that you may adopt.”
As Secretary Cowl finished, and even before he could sit down, a murmur
of approval swept through the room, and one or two of the cabinet
members actually clapped their hands in applauding the general plan
outlined by the head of the Air Department. For a few seconds there was
a spirited discussion as the members went over the points of Cowl’s
suggestions. Then John F. Seeley, the Secretary of War, arose and said:
“The Secretary of Air has stated the case concisely and admirably. I
agree absolutely with all his main points and heartily concur in the
methods he had so masterly proposed to meet the menacing situation.
There is, however, one phase of the situation that he only touched
upon--the use of naval craft in the pursuit.
“Under normal circumstances we would await the pronouncement of our
colleague of the Navy Department upon that subject, but in view of his
statement at the outset of this meeting I am presuming to venture a
suggestion in his place.
“Before I do so, however, I want to state that there may be a very
grave question as to the efficacy of a surface patrol in this
situation, and I would very urgently suggest that before anything
definite is done that we consult with the experts of the Navy
Department as to the utility and feasibility of using naval vessels.
“Should they decide that it would be feasible to use them, it seems to
me that since we are dealing solely with an aviation problem there are
only two classes of naval craft that can be at all considered in this
question--namely, destroyers and fast, light scout cruisers. Even these
are inadequate so far as speed is concerned, but we might find them
useful in long range, continuous patrol work.
“In using naval craft we must determine the amount of territory that we
are going to patrol. Having definitely done this, we can then decide
the exact number of vessels we shall require under the plan that I am
going to propose to you.
“From the vantage point of a destroyer’s decks or lookouts the skies
can be swept for a radius of approximately thirty miles. Therefore my
plan is this:--place flotillas of destroyers or squadrons of scout
cruisers on the ocean, each vessel to take a station sixty miles from
its neighbor in any direction. These vessels are to do patrol duty at a
predetermined speed along definite courses arranged so that the patrol
is constantly maintained over the same stretches of water. At no time
during the patrol must the sending apparatus of the wireless be used
by any vessel, but the operator on each ship must maintain a constant
watch at his receiver.
“All these vessels should be equipped with a low powered wireless
sending apparatus. I believe such sets are available, and the radio
engineer should be instructed to adjust them so that they have a range
no greater than sixty-five miles.
“If at any time it is necessary for the patrol craft to
intercommunicate they would use these sets for the purpose. In cases of
emergency they could use their regular sending apparatus.
“In the event of the pirate being observed the word will be passed
along the lines by the wireless sets. In this connection I would
suggest a simple code to express that fact, which could be followed
by the figures of the position. For instance the letter O could be
used to express the meaning ‘pirate observed’. Suppose he were seen in
Longitude 178 E. and Latitude 12 N.; the signal sent along the lines
would be 'O 178 12'.
“Immediately upon receipt of such a signal the vessels of the flotilla
would proceed to the general vicinity of that position at full speed
and render such assistance with their anti-aircraft guns as would be
possible under the circumstances.
“That is the general plan I have to suggest, gentlemen. If it is
feasible the next question to be determined will be the extent of the
territory we must cover by this means.”
A large map of the Pacific Ocean was spread across the table before
the members of the cabinet, and they had all studied it during the
discussion. At this stage the President said:
“Well, gentlemen, if it is found feasible by the naval experts to use
naval vessels in this work, don’t you think that it would be advisable,
in order to save valuable time, to authorize the Secretary of the Navy
to go ahead along the lines of the plan that Mr. Seeley has outlined,
or along similar lines that may be suggested by the naval staff. I
also think that Mr. Cowl should be authorized to proceed under the
admirable plan that he has put forward for the forces controlled by his
department.
“Before we go any further, however, I would like to state, in
connection with Mr. Seeley’s suggestion, that I have been studying
the map of the Pacific ocean. Of course I am not an expert, but at a
glance, it seemed to me that if naval vessels were used at all, it
would be a very good scheme to use them in a belt between the Hawaiian
archipelago and the Marshall Island group to the eastward. How much
territory would that involve Mr. Ingleton?”
“Why, roughly speaking, Mr. President,” replied the secretary of the
navy after a quick calculation, “it would mean a belt of about two
thousand miles in length, and I presume three hundred miles in width.
This would not be impossible. In 1919, within our own memory, the Navy
Department spread out a network of destroyers across the Atlantic Ocean
over a distance as long, although not so wide, in connection with the
first flight across that ocean with the historic old NC seaplanes that
are now in the Smithsonian Institute. So far as the physical aspects
are concerned, such a patrol would not be impossible.”
“That’s what I thought,” said the president. “There is another thing
that suggests itself to me, and it is this: Why not take advantage
of the location of the mid-Pacific islands as lookout positions,
place observers on each of them, and make them part of the general
observation system, with instructions to the observers to report
immediately to Honolulu if they should happen to sight the pirate.
“Well, gentlemen, I propose that the different departments be empowered
to put the suggestions made here to practical use. The details of each
scheme can be worked out by the experts and then be put into operation.”
Before any reply could be made to this suggestion, Secretary Ingleton
broke in and said:
“Mr. President, the fears that beset me constantly arise in my mind,
and I cannot overcome them. I feel that in the circumstances I am
in no condition to actively prosecute the affairs of my department,
particularly as the most pressing problem of the department is in
connection with the cause of my own troubles. Therefore I desire
to tender my resignation right now, and transfer my department to
abler hands. I will send you, Mr. President, the formal notice of my
resignation as soon as this meeting is concluded, and I implore you to
accept it in the interests of the country. I am going to the Orient to
cheer my wife and aid in the search of my daughter.”
CHAPTER TEN
For two months after the attack on the Wilbur Wright the airways of
the Pacific Ocean remained free from the activities of the unknown and
mysterious flying pirate. The aerial transport companies slowly and
cautiously resumed their schedules as the government patrol system
steadily increased in efficiency and scope.
Although the pirate had apparently suspended his operations, the
government had gone ahead with the organized plan developed at
Washington for dealing with the menace caused by his advent. By the end
of two months squadron after squadron of fighting airplanes had been
dispatched to the Pacific, and had taken up the duty of patrolling the
airways.
Under the plan of stationing a squadron at every available island as
nearly as possible within five hundred miles of each other, squadrons
had already been distributed and established as follows:
Squadron No. 1, at Johnston Island, Hawaiian Archipelago.
Squadron No. 2, at Wake Island.
Squadron No. 3, at Jaluit Island, Marshall group.
Squadron No. 4, at Ponape Island, Eastern Carolines.
Squadron No. 5, at Truk Island, Middle Carolines.
Squadron No. 6, at Yap Island, Pelew group.
Squadron No. 7 at Guam.
Squadron No. 8 at Asuncion, Marianas.
In addition to these, six reserve squadrons had their base at Honolulu
and were operating temporarily from the islands of Midway, Laysan,
Necker, Kauai, Oahu and Hawaii. All of the first eight squadrons were
now definitely engaged in patrolling the airways east of Honolulu. To
the westward the reserve squadrons and other squadrons on the Pacific
coast of the United States were doing similar work. Wing Commander
Fitzgerald in charge of pursuit operations had taken up headquarters
with squadron No. 2 on Wake Island as the most centrally located.
The squadrons on the islands had each twelve airplanes in reserve at
all times. Their headquarters had been linked together with special
cable arrangements wherever facilities permitted. Where cables did not
exist special wireless stations had been installed, and the code system
had been definitely agreed upon.
The big naval wireless stations at Honolulu, Guam and Manila had been
designated to control all operations within their respective zones,
and the Honolulu station was in supreme charge of the entire situation
so far as wireless was concerned. Each of the three big stations was
equipped with the latest type of Direction Finder apparatus.
Thus slowly, methodically and persistently the government laid the
trap which it hoped would ensnare the man who had caused the havoc
that threatened to entirely disrupt all aerial transportation. As yet,
however, the quarry had refused to snap at the bait and in fact had
apparently vanished completely so far as information revealed. The
routine of the organized plan, however, was continued daily, with an
occasional alarm to test the efficiency of the system.
Commodore Heathcote at Honolulu, who was in control of all base
operations, had taken a keen interest in all the plans for the pursuit
of the pirate and had personally tested all the arrangements. More
particularly was he interested in the wireless arrangements for
co-operating with the aerial fleets.
As soon as he was appointed, he made it a point of going to the naval
radio station at Honolulu and familiarizing himself with the methods
employed by the operators in picking up the signals of the pirate and
getting his location in the event the latter should use his wireless
apparatus. He listened attentively as the chief operator explained to
him the working of the Direction Finder.
“The theory of its operation is very simple, Sir,” said the latter,
“although some complicated calculations enter into the working out of
a position due to certain variations that have to be determined and
allowed for.”
“You see this loop of wire around this frame,” continued the operator
pointing to a large square wooden frame, around the edge of which a
wire was wound several times in parallel loops, with the two ends of
the wire attached to another piece of apparatus. “Well it was found
several years ago that such a ‘loop’ produced peculiar results when
placed in the path of a train of electro-magnetic waves. It was found
that if the edge of the loop was pointed toward the direction from
which the waves were coming, signals would be recorded on the apparatus
connected with it. In other words a small current was induced in the
coil which was then registered by the delicate detectors and recording
instruments.
“Now if the coil is turned so that its edge is at right angles to the
path of the waves there is absolutely no current induced in it. In
fact the moment the edge of the coil is turned away, either to the
right or the left, from the true direction of the wireless waves, the
signals immediately decrease in strength, and this decrease is more
pronounced the more the coil is turned toward the right angle position.
As a matter of fact the amount of current picked up by the loop is so
small that we have to employ apparatus that amplifies or increases the
effect produced by the current, consequently signals picked up from
long distance are only received when the edge of the coil is pointing
directly towards them.
“As you see, we use a compass with the Direction Finder. With that
we are able to get the bearing of the coil in degrees as soon as the
adjustment for the strongest signals has been completed. That bearing
of course tells us in what direction the station sending out the
messages is located. Of course there have to be allowances made for
magnetic deviation and certain other factors, but they are all charted
and comparatively easy to apply.”
“That’s very interesting,” said Commodore Heathcote, “very interesting,
but as I understand it that only gives you the direction of the sending
station. How do you find his exact location?”
“Well, we do that with the aid of two known wireless stations and
triangulation,” replied the operator. “It’s done this way. Take for
instance the station at Guam and this station. Suppose there is a ship
at sea between us that is sending out signals, and we wish to determine
its exact location. First of all I get a bearing on the ship with my
Direction Finder, and of course Guam is doing the same thing with
its apparatus at the same time. Now we know the exact latitude and
longitude of both Guam and this station. As soon as I get the bearing I
take a chart and then work out the angle of the bearing to our meridian
of longitude and continue the resulting line of that angle across the
chart.
“Guam then tells me what bearing he has obtained on the ship. I
repeat the operation by obtaining the angle of Guam’s bearing to his
meridian, and also continue the line across the chart. Somewhere on
the chart the two lines will cross each other, and the point where
they cross is the exact location of the ship that is sending out the
wireless signals. If the ship is moving we repeat the process in a
couple of hours, and that gives us an exact line on the course the ship
is following. That’s how it is done, Sir.”
“By George!”, exclaimed Heathcote, “that’s wonderful. Now I’m sorry
I didn’t pay more attention to wireless. Why, there are marvelous
possibilities in that. The more I think of it the more it appears to be
the only way in which we shall be able to track this fellow down. God
help him if ever he opens his wireless mouth.”
“If he does, Sir, we’ll get him sure,” said the operator with the
earnestness of conviction.
CHAPTER ELEVEN
Day after day had passed in continuous patrol by the aircraft
units without event. The concentrated destroyer and cruiser patrol
discussed by the President and his cabinet in Washington had not been
established, as the experts of the naval staff had considered it would
be ineffectual in the circumstances. By this time practically all the
aircraft of the aerial patrol developed in detail at the conference in
Washington had been placed at their respective posts over the Pacific
Ocean, and the whole plan was functioning well. The airway had remained
clear so far as anything of piratical intent was concerned, and the
aerial transit lines were very close to normal again.
So the daily round of routine passed until one morning, about ten weeks
after the pirate had made his conspicuous advent, the operator at the
Honolulu naval wireless station was suddenly moved into intensive
concentration by strange signals in the receivers about his ears.
Although they were continuous wave signals and lacked the individuality
of the old type spark signals, there was nevertheless a very familiar
aspect about the sending itself that caused the operator to pay the
closest attention to the signals.
Switching hurriedly to the Direction Finder apparatus he began to work
feverishly with the searching coil, moving it around slowly within
the radius of a narrow arc as he adjusted the delicate receiving
instruments connected with it. While he worked with excited but
skillful haste, he turned around to his assistant and exclaimed:
“I’ve got the pirate. Get Manila and Guam on the cable quick. Tell them
to get a bearing on him. He’s using a five thousand meter wave. Rush it
before he stops sending.”
The assistant jumped to the table where the cable apparatus was located
and in a few seconds had flashed the news across the Pacific that set
the operators at the other two control stations busy.
“Gee!”, yelled the chief operator in delight after a few more seconds
intensive work, “I’ve got my bearing on him. If the other fellows hurry
up they can get one too before he stops. Get Mr. Heathcote on the
’phone. Tell him we’ve got the pirate, and that we’ve got a bearing on
him. My bearing reads W by S 78. Rush it quick now. This looks like the
best chance we may get.”
In response to the telephone message Commodore Heathcote came rushing
over to the wireless station personally.
“Have you heard from Manila or Guam yet?” he inquired.
“Not yet, Sir,” replied the operator.
“Is the pirate still sending?”
“No Sir, he stopped just before you came in.”
At this moment the cable instruments began to work, and the assistant
operator read out aloud each word from off the tape as it came in:
“Guam--got--bearing--on--pirate--just--before--he
stopped--sending--but not--finally--adjusted--for
maximum--signals--bearing--as--obtained--is--E by S 82.”
“Fine,” said Commodore Heathcote, “you say yours was W by S 78.
Alright, give me that chart.”
Quickly and steadily the air officer worked out the triangulation
of the bearing on the chart, first obtaining the bearing line on
the Honolulu reading, then one from the Guam bearing. When this was
completed he continued the resulting lines across the chart until they
crossed one another.
“That puts him roughly in latitude 16.50 N. and longitude 179 W.” he
mused to himself, “Let’s see now, that’s about 700 miles from Wake
Island, and--er--about 500 miles from Johnston Island.”
Turning to the operator he said: “Get Commander Fitzgerald on the cable
at Wake Island quickly. Tell him we have heard the pirate sending by
wireless from Latitude 16.50 N. and Longitude 179 W. Tell him to rush
to that position at full speed with every available machine in his
squadron. Tell him that we will advise him by wireless code of any
change in the pirate’s position we may get. If he doesn’t hear from us
again, tell him to make a general search of that vicinity as soon as
he arrives there. By the way you haven’t heard from Manila, have you?”
“No, Sir.”
“Alright, get Wake Island first, then when you have sent the message
call up Manila and ask him if he got a bearing. If he did we may be
able to work out a more definite position.”
The assistant operator at the cable complied with the Commodore’s
request, and in a few moments got an acknowledgment of the receipt of
the message from Wake Island. Then he called up Manila. After a short
conversation with the operator at the latter station, he told the
Commodore that Manila had not been able to get his instruments adjusted
properly before the pirate stopped sending.
“Alright, never mind, we’ll do the best we can with this,” said
Commodore Heathcote, “Let’s see now, there’s no cable at Johnston
Island is there? Well, I don’t know whether it would be advisable to
notify the squadron there by wireless or not. The position that we
would have to give with the message would tip the pirate off that we
were on his trail. Wait a little while till we hear from Fitzgerald,
and then I’ll tell you what to do. In any case it will not take the
machines at Johnston Island so long to get to the position as it will
Fitzgerald’s squadron.”
About five minutes later a cable reply was received from Commodore
Fitzgerald at Wake Island. It said that fourteen airplanes of the
squadron stationed on the island were ready to take off and would
start out immediately to the position given.
“That’s fine,” said Heathcote, “it will take them about three and a
half hours to get there. Fitzgerald will undoubtedly use his judgment
in spreading his forces so as to cover as wide an area as possible.
Keep our ears open for the pirate, and if he sends again get a bearing
on him if possible so that we can get an idea of the course he is
following. Tell Manila and Guam the same thing over the cable. Don’t
use your wireless at all. I’ll be back again soon and let you know when
to advise the Johnston Island squadron. If you get another position let
me know immediately.”
“Alright sir,” replied the operator.
Before Commodore Heathcote got to the door, the operator at the cable
instruments called to him to wait a moment as a message was coming. A
few seconds later, he said:
“It’s from Wake Island, sir, he says that Commander Fitzgerald with
fourteen airplanes has just left in pursuit of the pirate.”
CHAPTER TWELVE
For two hours after Commander Fitzgerald and his squadron left Wake
Island a wireless silence reigned over the Pacific Ocean. Throughout
that period the operators at the naval wireless stations of Honolulu,
Guam and Manila sat with the telephone receivers glued to their ears
listening with concentrated attention for the slightest sound from the
pirate.
In the meantime the squadron of pursuit airplanes was speeding over the
vast reaches of the ocean at slightly better than two hundred miles
an hour toward the position given in the cable message from Honolulu.
They were now within a flying distance of one hour and a half from that
spot. The question revolving in the mind of Commander Fitzgerald as he
sped along was the probability of the pirate rushing along from the
position given at a speed equal to, or even greater than their own. The
next two hours would determine that all important point.
Suddenly in all three of the great naval wireless station the signals
from the pirate’s airplane were heard again simultaneously. Clearly
and distinctly they came across the intervening space. Apparently the
operator on board was merely trying out his apparatus because he was
not sending out any intelligible message. Nevertheless the operators
at the naval stations took full advantage of the situation and trained
their Direction Finders on him. A few moments work and all three
obtained bearings before the pirate operator ceased sending.
“’Phone Commodore Heathcote quick,” yelled the chief operator at the
Honolulu station to his assistant. This done he continued, “Now get
Guam and Manila and ask them if they got bearings.”
Before the cable queries were sent and answered Commodore Heathcote
entered the station.
“What do you make it this time?” he inquired breathlessly.
“Why, Sir, it’s very strange,” said the operator, “but my reading
is exactly the same as last time. I’m waiting to see what Guam and
Honolulu say so that I can check up with them.”
“Here’s the Guam report now,” broke in the assistant operator from the
cable table. “It says ‘my bearing is the same as last time. I made two
adjustments but obtained the same results each time.’”
“Alright,” said Heathcote, “Now call up Manila and see if by any chance
he has succeeded in getting a reading. He was forewarned this time, and
may have got a bearing. If he has it will act as a complete check on
the position.”
After a few seconds’ work, the operator at the cable instruments got up
and said: “Yes sir, he obtained a bearing, and he reports that it is E
by N 87.”
“That’s good, let’s see what it shows,” replied Heathcote as he picked
up a chart and commenced to work upon it.
“By George!” he continued a few moments later, “that absolutely
confirms your first observation and puts the position at 16.50 N.,
179 W. The only explanation I can give for it is that the pirate has
been flying in circles around that general vicinity, probably for the
purpose of picking up and attacking some commercial airship. If he
only keeps there, Fitzgerald will get to him within the next hour. We
couldn’t have wished for anything better.”
“Shall I advise Commander Fitzgerald by wireless, sir?” asked the
operator.
“No,” replied Heathcote, “keep quiet. Fitzgerald is going to that
position as fast as he can get there. He will continue on his course
I’m sure, even though he does not hear from us, and it will bring him
there shortly. If you send any signals now it will tip the pirate off.
Fitzgerald will be able to tackle him with his squadron, and won’t need
any assistance. This looks like a great chance to get this fellow. I
don’t think it would be wise to send the Johnston Island squadron after
him. No, the best thing we can do now is to keep quiet. Tell Guam and
Manila the same thing. Tell them under no circumstances to use their
wireless again without instructions from us.”
For the next hour Heathcote remained in the wireless station. Both he
and the chief operator were in a state of suppressed excitement. The
latter listened intently for the slightest sound. In their minds both
conjured up a picture of the dramatic scene that they were certain
was about to be enacted close to the central meridian of the eastern
world, a scene they felt sure would cause a thrill to surge throughout
civilization. The minutes ticked slowly by until more than an hour
passed since the second reading had been obtained. Then across the
ether came this signal from Fitzgerald’s airplane:
“PCG.”
That was all. Heathcote, keenly alert, had noticed the almost
imperceptible movement of the operator as the signal commenced and
leaned over his shoulder as the latter wrote down the three letter
signal.
“Good,” exclaimed the commodore, “that means he has sighted the pirate.
Now things will begin to happen in a few minutes. Everything depends
upon the speed and maneuvrability of the pirate machine. If it is no
better than our own machines we’ll get him sure.”
Patiently the three men in the wireless station waited for what seemed
an eternity. Then suddenly there came this signal:
“AE.”
“That means he has engaged the pirate,” said Heathcote, “and has opened
fire. Keep your ears open now for everything that comes along. There’s
nothing more we can do but wait.”
And wait they did. For thirty long minutes not a sound came from the
spot in the vast Pacific where was being fought the momentous battle
in the skies that was to determine the immediate future of commercial
transport. At the end of that period Heathcote could no longer restrain
his impatience. He said to the operator:
“Send out a call to Fitzgerald and ask him what has happened if you can
get him.”
The operator obeyed. For several minutes he called repeatedly, but
could get no reply. Suddenly at the end of ten minutes he began to
adjust his receiving apparatus very carefully with his right hand,
while with his left hand he pressed the telephone receiver tightly into
his ear. He continued this for several minutes and then with a sigh of
disappointment relaxed.
“What’s the trouble,” asked Commodore Heathcote.
“I couldn’t raise Commander Fitzgerald’s ship,” replied the operator,
“but I heard very faint signals that sounded like the sending of the
pirate operator. I thought perhaps he was using a small powered set.
I tried to amplify the signals, but it was no use. He was sending
something but I couldn’t make out what it was.”
“That’s strange,” said the air officer, “I wonder what’s happened.
In any case if that was the pirate it means that he is still flying,
otherwise he wouldn’t be sending by wireless. I wonder why Fitzgerald
doesn’t reply.”
“Oh, here he is now, sir,” said the operator, “he’s sending something.
Wait now.”
Picking up a pencil the operator began to write the following:
“Why do you impose such a condition. Why don’t you act like a man. You
ought to take a fair chance or none at all.”
“Is that what he said?” asked Heathcote, and receiving an answer in the
affirmative continued, “I wonder what he means? That certainly sounds
funny.”
The operator listened in for several minutes but no further messages
were sent. He had just made up his mind to call up Fitzgerald when
signals began coming in. Turning to Commodore Heathcote the operator
exclaimed.
“Here’s Commander Fitzgerald calling us now, Sir.”
The operator answered the call, and then began to write:
“Heathcote Honolulu: We sighted the pirate flying in circles at
approximate altitude of twenty-five thousand. At that time we were
in widespread formation at fifteen thousand. I gave order to ascend
to twenty-five thousand. The pirate continued flying on his circular
course until we came within range.
“I ordered our machines to open fire at three thousand yards, and
the pirate returned it. Suddenly he straightened out his course and
commenced to fly due north. We followed up, but he evidently had
greatly superior speed and greater climbing ability. We started the
chase but he soon outdistanced us, and he is now disappearing over the
northern horizon. We were making two hundred miles an hour, but he must
be doing close to three hundred miles an hour. We were hopelessly
outclassed. Just as he was disappearing we received a call from him by
wireless. He sent us the following message:
“‘You took us by surprise today, and we weren’t ready to engage you. We
are not afraid of your superior numbers. We are going back to our base
for more ammunition. We shall be back at the same position tomorrow at
this time, and will join action with you on the following conditions:
that you do not bring any more airplanes with you than you have today;
that no other machines are held in reserve; and that you do not send
any destroyers or cruisers to this position. We are willing to give you
battle on those terms. By the way, we promised to give Miss Ingleton a
flight tomorrow.’
“You can easily see the significance of that last sentence. I
will discuss this with you by cable when we get back to our
base.--Fitzgerald.”
CHAPTER THIRTEEN
Three hours after the dramatic scene had been enacted in Mid-Pacific,
Commander Fitzgerald and his squadron landed at their base on
Wake Island. After ordering the mechanics to examine the machines
thoroughly, Fitzgerald went to the telegraph office where, with the aid
of the operator, he resumed his conversation with Commodore Heathcote
at Honolulu. It began with a detailed description of the remarkable
encounter with the pirate over the vast expanse of the Pacific. It
told of the receipt of the wireless challenge from the pirate with its
sardonic conclusion and continued with Fitzgerald exclaiming:
“My God, Heathcote, it looks as though he were carrying Miss Ingleton
with him as a shield wherever he goes. It certainly complicates the
situation for us.”
“It’s a terrible dilemma,” agreed Heathcote, “but we’ve got a duty to
perform. Don’t you think perhaps that the last part of his message is a
bluff to scare us off and insure his immunity from attack?”
“It may be,” came back the answer, “but we can’t afford to take any
chance on it.”
“That may be true,” replied Heathcote, “and there’s no doubt that if
you attack him you will jeopardize the life of Miss Ingleton, but we
must not allow the last circumstance to deter us from making the attack.
“The pirate may not be as careful of life in future attacks as he has
been in the past if he gets the impression that he has secured immunity
from attack by the presence of Miss Ingleton on board. It is a stern
situation that faces us, but my judgement is that we have a duty
confronting us, and that we must perform that duty irrespective of the
consequences.”
“It may be just a blind to cover up his operations somewhere else,”
said Fitzgerald.
“Well, if it’s a plant,” replied Heathcote, “we will have to take care
of the situation to the best of our ability with the other squadrons.
They have all been advised now and are on the alert. If he’s on the
level about coming to the same position, it’s a good chance to have a
go at him. You ought to be able to take his measure with your squadron,
if he will stand the fight and not take advantage of his great speed.”
“Don’t misunderstand me,” Fitzgerald shot back, “I desire nothing
better than to try conclusions with him, and I’m anxious to get back
there. I was only discussing the possibilities of the situation so
that we couldn’t get left anywhere. You don’t realize how serious the
situation is with me, old man. I may as well tell you right now that
I am desperately in love with Miss Ingleton and would willingly give
my life for her, and now I am placed in a position where by doing my
duty I may take her life. Oh, I know the dictates of duty allow but one
decision, but I’m human. Besides, I have another duty to her parents.
I promised them to take care of her under all circumstances. Don’t you
see what a difficult position I am in?”
“Yes, I understand,” replied Heathcote, “and I certainly sympathize
with you, but it seems to me the best thing to do under the
circumstances will be for you to proceed to the position we located
him in yesterday, with your squadron fully prepared to engage him. You
ought to arrange to arrive there as nearly as possible at the same
time as today. I’ll tell my wireless operator and the operators at
Guam and Manila to keep a sharp lookout for him. If he starts sending
by wireless we can check up on his position and let you know where he
is. If he does show up I think that you ought to engage him and take a
chance of disabling him if possible. If you could do that and compel
him to alight on the surface of the ocean there might be a chance of
saving Miss Ingleton. What do you think?”
“Alright then, I’ll go back to that position at the same time
tomorrow,” replied Fitzgerald, “I’ll be ready to engage him if he shows
up. I’ll also be on the lookout for any communication from you. I’ll do
the best I can and instruct every pilot in my squadron to do likewise.”
CHAPTER THIRTEEN
The following day dawned fair and clear, and with everything
prearranged Fitzgerald and his squadron set out again to the rendezvous
with the pirate, but without the keen desire and light-heartedness that
marked their departure on the previous day.
Fitzgerald’s heart was heavy with fear but he was now on his way
determined to engage the pirate no matter what the consequences to his
beloved might be. For the moment he was a man prompted in his actions
solely by the strength of a single determination.
From the time his squadron left its base at Wake Island a hundred ears
listened patiently but anxiously upon the various islands for the
outcome, and the operators at the three big naval wireless stations
were keenly alert on their jobs. Each minute that slowly passed by was
almost a lifetime of concentrated effort for them. For two long weary
hours this condition prevailed. Then came the break in the monotony,
as all three simultaneously heard the signals of the pirate’s wireless
voice.
Feverishly they worked with their Direction Finders. Each moment was
precious, as there was no telling when the pirate operator would cease
his voluntary effort, particularly as he must be fully aware by this
time that his tell-tale signals were betraying his location to the
alert ears of the government operators. Still he continued sending as
though blissfully ignorant of the fact.
A few moments of intensive work on the part of the naval operators
completed their important task, and a brief cable intercommunication
gave the operator at Honolulu all three bearings. These the latter
quickly worked out on the chart. The resulting position showed the
pirate was practically in the same locality that he had been detected
in the previous day. Shortly before this Commodore Heathcote had
entered the wireless room to await the outcome of the situation, and he
went over the position with the operator.
“Well, that’s alright,” said Heathcote; then as though thinking aloud,
he continued, “It shows he has kept the first part of his challenge.
Now if he’ll only stand a fight we may get him, but can we save Miss
Ingleton, that’s the question? There’s another thing that I’m worried
about too, and that’s his willingness to fight. He has already shown
that he possesses superior speed to us and he may have another surprise
up his sleeve as far as fighting is concerned. I can think of no other
reason for his apparent willingness to accept a fight against greater
odds. Still if he has such a surprise we might as well learn it by
experience now as later. It may mean the safety of Miss Ingleton.
Anyway once we know what it is we can take steps to meet it in the
future. One thing I’m sure of and that is Fitzgerald will give him a
good fight even if it means sacrificing Miss Ingleton. He puts duty
above everything else.”
Then to the operator he said:
“Call up Fitzgerald and tell him by code we’ve located the pirate in
the same position.”
This the operator did, and then for slightly more than an hour another
weary wait ensued for the watchers ashore. Presently came the signal
from Fitzgerald that he had sighted the pirate, and this was followed
twenty minutes later by the three letter code indicating the battle
had opened between the man who had outlawed himself and the organized
forces of government.
It was the signal for anxious moments in the wireless station, where
the full significance of the momentous battle was fully understood.
Would the pirate stand his ground to the conclusion of the encounter
and risk Miss Ingleton and himself, or would he again take advantage of
his great speed and flee from the scene at the critical moment of the
fight? Did he have Miss Ingleton aboard, as he intimated he would in
his wireless challenge? Had he really some battle surprise to spring on
his unwary but numerous opponents?
These questions were to be fully answered within a short time, but in
the period of uncertain waiting that had to elapse before the outcome
of the battle could be learned every possible angle of the tense
dramatic situation revolved again and again within their minds.
For ten epochal minutes they waited and then came another three letter
code signal from Fitzgerald. Air Commodore Heathcote quickly decoded it.
“It says the engagement is now general. That means the pirate is
standing his ground and risking everything. Now we’ll soon know whether
he has got any surprise in store for us or not.”
For another fifteen minutes the watchers at the wireless station waited
with as much patience as they could command. Then suddenly the operator
with almost imperceptible movement straightened up in his chair, picked
up his pencil and began to write:
“R. C. G.”
“Good God!” exclaimed Heathcote, “that means the pirate has been
vanquished. Get Fitzgerald back as quick as you can and ask him to give
us a brief outline of the fight right away. Ask him if Miss Ingleton
was saved. My God, get him quick! This suspense is killing.”
Without waiting to reply the operator grasped his key and sent out the
call, while the air commodore leaned over his shoulder impatiently. In
a few minutes the answer came back:
“I am flying direct to Honolulu, but will stop at Johnston Island
for fuel. I will make a complete report. We have won the victory,
but I have lost my soul. The pirate airplane was shot down and sank
immediately with all hands, including Miss Ingleton.”
Heathcote read the message word by word mechanically as the operator
wrote it down. Then in a brief flash its full significance sank
deep within his mind, and he collapsed in his chair from the mental
overstrain.
“Oh! my God!” he exclaimed weakly. “Have we done right. What shall I
do.”
CHAPTER FIFTEEN
Hour after hour Heathcote, a prey to conflicting emotions, waited with
patience at the landing beach of the Pearl Harbor seaplane station for
the arrival of Fitzgerald from the scene of action. Ten hours after the
momentous battle in the skies had been fought the leading pursuit plane
of number two squadron hove in sight and quickly came to a landing in
the bay.
As it drew up alongside the landing beach, mechanics waded out and
carried Commander Fitzgerald back on their shoulders to the beach. He
was almost exhausted from the long physical and mental strain he had
undergone. Heathcote rushed over to him, and grasping him by the arm,
almost shouted in his anxiety.
“Come over to my office quick, and tell me all about it.”
The two men walked over to the executive buildings and entered
Heathcote’s office, where Fitzgerald literally fell into a chair from
exhaustion and explained:
“Get me a stimulant of some kind, and then I’ll tell you what happened.”
A few moments later he began his narrative of the encounter with the
pirate:
“We arrived at the position and found conditions about the same as
yesterday,” he began. “The pirate was circling around at about the
same altitude. I had maneuvered to the north of him to be in a better
position in case he should determine to run.
“As soon as we came within 3,000 yards of him I was about to give the
signal to open fire, when he began to send us a message on his short
range wireless set. In it he said:
“‘I see you have complied with the conditions I stated yesterday. Are
you still determined to fight?’
“I told him I was, and then he said:
“‘Well, I thought it was only fair to tell you that I have Miss
Ingleton on board. She is coming out to wave to you.’
“By this time we were pretty close to the pirate’s machine. As he
finished sending a figure from the forward gunner’s cockpit, and, after
standing upright a few moments as though in doubt, began to wave to
us rather weakly. The figure was clad in flying clothes and it was
impossible to recognize who it was. There was, however, something about
the waving of the arm that suggested a feminine rather than a masculine
gesture. In my mind there was no doubt that it was Miss Ingleton.
“The sight of her standing there helpless at the pirate’s mercy, and
undoubtedly compelled to do his bidding, made me see red. It was a good
thing for the pirate that he was not near me at the time. I could have
torn him limb from limb in my fury.
“The effect on the rest of my squadron was the same. I had discussed
the situation fully with my pilots before we left Wake Island and had
impressed upon them the fact that duty was paramount to everything.
Despite their anger at the pirate’s tactics they were not at all
anxious to be instrumental in the death of a woman. Still they were
ready to obey my orders.
“I signaled back to the pirate to get ready for action because I
was going to attack immediately and not waste any further time in
theatricals. That’s what I told him. There was a change of figures in
the forward cockpit of the pirate’s machine, which was undoubtedly the
gunner taking the place of Miss Ingleton who went inside the machine.
“I gave the order to engage and all our ships opened fire with
incendiary shells. The pirate answered vigorously. We soon found
the range but he began a series of lightning-like maneuvers that
demonstrated the remarkable qualities of his machine, particularly in
its ability for rapid climb. He commenced to climb, and we followed
him, but we were outclassed.
“He was putting up a magnificent fight, and with the advantage of
maneuvrability in his favor, he succeeded in shooting down two of our
machines in the first two minutes of the encounter. This loss fired the
rest of our squadron with the desire to finish the pirate once for all.
“The action was now general. Our men were firing every time there was
an opportunity. The advantage of superior maneuvring ability enjoyed by
the pirate, however, put him in a favorable position of immunity from
concentrated attack, because we were so numerous there was a chance
that we might hit one another. Consequently our men were only firing
when they got an absolute sight on the pirate’s machine.
“After a few minutes indulged in these tactics the pirate began a rapid
descent, and we followed him as closely as possible. The battle was
continued throughout the maneuvre of descent.
“Down came the pirate until he wasn’t more than a hundred feet from
the surface of the ocean. In this position he went through a number of
rapid evolutions fighting desperately all the time. At this altitude
he showed considerable daring and succeeded in downing another of our
machines. Our men were having more difficulty at the low altitude,
especially while turning.
“Quite suddenly it was noticed that the forward gunner on the pirate
machine was missing from his position, and for several seconds there
had not been a shot fired from any part of his machine at all. Before
the pirate could resume action one of our ships seemed to get a lucky
hit, and the most remarkable thing I have ever seen occurred. The wings
of the pirate machine literally crumpled up, and it plunged into the
sea. It was not a nose dive, because he went under at a wide angle with
terrific speed, leaving a tremendous wash of water behind. The whole
thing happened so quickly that it was impossible to give an accurate
description of the scene.
“We cruised around for a few minutes, but there was no further sign of
the pirate’s machine. It had disappeared completely and carried all
hands with it. We had hoped to be able to rescue Miss Ingleton, and I
landed on the surface and cruised around near the scene looking for
every possible chance to do this, but our efforts were in vain. There
was not a single trace left of him. Apparently he had sunk absolutely
and completely. There was not even a trace of oil on the surface where
he disappeared.
“I am sorry to say that Flight Lieutenants Frank, Evans and Dallinger
were killed in the action together with their gunners and mechanics.
Their machines were completely lost, and we were unable to render them
any assistance. That is our story, all there is of it.”
As he concluded, Fitzgerald rose to his feet unsteadily. A marked
change had come over him as he reached the climax of his dramatic
story. He was plainly in the throes of dispair. Upon his face there was
a look of horror, and his hands were tightly clenched by the intensity
of his feelings. His whole frame shook violently as he raised his arms
and then shouted with a frenzy that was almost histerical:
“I have done my duty,--yes, I have done my duty, but I have damned
my heart and soul. For the rest of my life the vision of my beloved
standing irresolute and waving her arm with such hesitant fear in the
pirate’s machine will be forever before me. I cannot cast it from my
mind. It remains to prey upon my conscience. I have done my duty, but
at what a price,--I am through. Oh! my God! I’ve killed the woman I
love!”
The light of passion died out in Fitzgerald’s eyes. He wavered a moment
upon his tired feet and then collapsed from sheer exhaustion and mental
agony. Heathcote rushed over to him and with some difficulty managed
to get him into a chair. He then reached for restoratives and began to
apply them.
As he worked the door of his office opened. Heathcote looked up. On
the threshold stood Arthur Ingleton, former secretary of the Navy.
For several seconds the two men looked at each other, then Ingleton
exclaimed:
“Tell me, what has happened to my daughter?”
CHAPTER SIXTEEN
Thus came the climax to the most remarkable piratical adventure in
history. Glaring headlines in the newspapers throughout the world
told the story of the dramatic battle in the skies and brought a sigh
of relief to the inhabitants of every country that the menace of the
pirate had been removed. Editorials galore were written pointing out
the futility of such excursions into outlawry and praising the action
of organized government that planned and executed so successfully the
measures against the man who had placed himself outside the pale of the
law.
Although the news of the pirate’s demise brought a feeling of
satisfaction to the world in general to two persons in Honolulu it
brought calamity. To one, a father, it brought grief over the tragic
death of his only daughter and fear for the recovery of his wife who
had been prostrated from shock ever since the forcible abduction of
her daughter by the pirate. To the other, the victor over the pirate,
after a brief moment of merciful oblivion, it brought a state of
collapse of all his forces of vitality which set in as a result of the
complications that had followed upon his physical fatigue and grave
mental anguish.
Fitzgerald’s condition had become so serious after his collapse that
it had been necessary to remove him immediately to the post hospital.
There physicians were attempting to restore him, but his mental
condition was such that they expressed grave fears over the chances of
his recovery.
By one of the strangest freaks of fortune, Arthur Ingleton had arrived
on the transpacific airship at Honolulu at the dramatic moment in
Fitzgerald’s narrative. He arrived to begin the quest for his daughter,
only to learn that she had been killed.
His was a tragic quandary. On the one hand he found his mission set to
naught at its very inception by the irony of fate, and on the other
he was confronted with the task of breaking the news to his wife who
was already in a serious condition as the result of the abduction of
her daughter. What effect would the news of her death have upon his
wife? He dreaded the thought. He had already made inquiries as to her
condition to telephone immediately after his arrival. When told how
serious her condition was he had agreed with the hospital authorities
that it would be best not to tell her of his arrival before he had
surveyed the situation. Now all he had to tell her, when greeting her,
was that Mary was dead.
As he pondered over the situation he realized that he must think before
acting. “I cannot tell her yet,” he told himself, “because the news
would kill her. Yet I cannot permit her to build up false hopes as the
effect of the final announcement might be equally grave. I must await
before seeing her and plan out some means whereby the shock of the news
will be minimized.”
For two days he was impaled upon the horns of his dilemma, with no
escape in sight. It was more than two months since his wife had been
carried to the hospital after her daughter was taken on the pirate
machine. He himself had not been able to get to Honolulu before because
of the interruption in the transpacific airship schedules caused by
the presence and activity of the pirate. His wife was convalescing
very slowly, and while much better physically, was still in such a
mental state that her physicians counseled against anything that might
cause her further shock. He had consulted with them, told them of the
situation as soon as he had learned Fitzgerald’s story and asked their
advice. They told him it were best for the present to keep the news of
their daughter’s death from his wife, and also that it would be better
for him to wait further before seeing her, particularly as she would
unquestionably ask him about Mary.
Not only was Mrs. Ingleton in a serious condition, but Commander
Fitzgerald was much worse. His long exposure in the flight to the
scene of the battle and during the battle, and the subsequent flight
to Honolulu, coupled with the extreme mental strain under which he had
labored, had produced such serious results that the doctors at the
post hospital were of the opinion that his recovery would be a very
long process, even with every chance favoring him. In fact they frankly
stated there was a strong possibility that he might not recover at all.
During the past two days he had been in a semi-conscious state, but
extremely restless. Throughout this period he uttered unintelligible
and incoherent sentences in long, rambling speeches, and he had not had
a single lucid moment. He had failed completely to recognize anyone who
approached him. Even Ingleton who called in the hospital in the hope of
learning something from him about Mary’s death, failed to elicit the
slightest recognition.
Such was the situation at Honolulu. In the meantime Commodore Heathcote
and the other air commanders had received instructions from Washington
to disband, as quickly as possible, all the emergency aerodromes that
had been established for the purpose of coping with the pirate. They
were told to superintend the work of transporting all the squadrons and
their equipment back to their permanent bases.
This work was already under way. The commercial air transportation
lines resumed their normal schedules. The operating companies had lost
no time, after the official notice of the pirate’s destruction had been
announced, in getting back to their regular service. The experience
gained since the advent of the pirate and during his brief reign of
terror, were the subject of many governmental conferences. From all
quarters came the insistent demand for adequate permanent policing of
the distant airways of the world with the most up-to-date and effective
aircraft units, so that any possible menace of similar nature could in
the future be coped with at the very outset, thereby eliminating any
possibility of disruption to the regular aerial transit lines that had
become necessary arteries in the world’s commerce.
To satisfy this demand two picked squadrons that had been dispatched
to the Pacific for duty against the pirate were ordered to remain in
Honolulu temporarily until such time as their permanent location for
police duty should have been finally decided.
CHAPTER SEVENTEEN
The time passed slowly as the situation over the Pacific Ocean
gradually assumed a normal condition. Day after day lapsed into
infinity with Arthur Ingleton waiting aimlessly and almost hopelessly,
wondering what to do. In this manner two weeks passed by. Then one
morning he received a call at his hotel over the telephone from the
hospital where his wife was lying, asking him to come there as quickly
as possible. On arrival there he was met by the superintendent who said:
“I’m very sorry to tell you Mr. Ingleton that your wife has suffered
a relapse, and we thought it best to call you. I will summon Dr.
Harrington who is attending her.”
A few moments later Dr. Harrington came into the superintendent’s room.
“There is no use in discussing the situation, Mr. Ingleton,” he said,
“Your wife has taken a decided turn for the worse. She is in a kind
of stupor. I have been thinking that if we could awaken her interest
we might bring about a change and put her on the road to recovery.
There is no doubt that your presence will revive her interest, but if
she should find out about your daughter’s death the result would be
disastrous. What do you think?”
The expression of deep concern and apprehension that crept over
Ingleton’s face clearly showed his thoughts. After a few moments’
reflection he said:
“I think it may be just as well if I go and see her. I may be able to
awaken her interest sufficiently to help in improving her condition.
If she asks me about Mary, I’ll try to evade her question for the time
being.”
Ingleton followed Dr. Harrington through the hospital until they came
to a room where his wife was lying. As they entered, the nurse who
was sitting alongside the bed, got up and made way for them. Ingleton
walked over to the head of the bed and, bending over, kissed his wife
and gently clasped her hand. The patient’s eyes opened languidly and
glanced up wearily. Then as she recognized her husband, they lit with a
gleam of pleasurable excitement.
“Oh! Arthur,” she said feebly, “I’m so glad you came. I have waited
such a long time for you, dear.”
An expression of contentment settled upon her worn face, and Dr.
Harrington who stood by watching closely, nodded approvingly.
“I came here as quickly as I could, dear,” replied Ingleton. “Now I
want to see you get well again soon.”
“Oh! I will,” declared his wife, and then as in an after-thought, she
asked, “Have you got Mary for me?”
For a moment Ingleton paused, thinking rapidly for a reply. Before he
could frame one his wife exclaimed:
“Nothing has happened to her, Arthur?”
The unexpectedness of this question coming in the midst of his hurried
thoughts left Ingleton still further perplexed and at a loss for an
answer with which to allay his wife’s anxiety. With quick intuition she
grasped the situation and cried out:
“Oh! Arthur, for God’s sake, tell me! I know something terrible has
happened, and you don’t want to tell me. I know it. What is it?”
“There, there, dear,” pleaded Ingleton, “Don’t excite yourself. We want
you to get well again. Everything will be alright.”
“Oh! you’re hiding it from me,” sobbed his wife, “you won’t tell me. I
know it’s something terrible. I know it! I know it!!”
Turning over in bed and burying her face in the pillows, she burst
into a fit of hysterical tears, and her weakened frame shook with the
violence of her sobs. Her husband looked on in helpless fear. Dr.
Harrington, however, quickly saw the seriousness of the situation and,
summoning the nurse, administered a drug in an effort to quiet the
paroxysm of his patient. He motioned Ingleton to be seated and not to
say anything further.
While this pathetic scene was being enacted in the hospital, another
more amazing one was taking place over the Pacific Ocean. The wireless
operator on duty at Pearl Harbor, listening with indifferent patience,
had been electrified into sudden action by an S. O. S. call. Quickly
answering it, he received a reply from the transpacific airship
Montgolfier, whose operator sent the following message:
“Montgolfier, 300 miles east of Honolulu attacked by strange airplane.
We are disabled and settling to the surface of the ocean rapidly. Rush
assistance immediately. Won’t be able to send much longer.”
Before the Honolulu operator could acknowledge the message, another
call came in on the same wavelength. There was something familiar about
the sending, and he listened carefully. Presently the second station
began to send a message. Picking up a pencil the Pearl Harbor operator
wrote down:
“Please give my compliments to Commodore Heathcote. Tell him he has
a lot to learn about the art of aviation. I hope that Commander
Fitzgerald enjoyed his little scrap with us. Miss Ingleton sends her
best wishes.”
That was all. Reading it over after it was completed, the operator
rubbed his head in amazement and then exclaimed:
“Well I’ll be damned.”
For a few minutes he sent out a series of queries to the sender of
the message, but got no further response. He also tried to get in
touch with the Montgolfier again, but his efforts in this respect also
failed. Then he telephoned to Commodore Heathcote and read the message
to him. The latter came over to the station, where he examined the
message carefully and questioned the operator about their receipt.
“Good God!” he exclaimed, “if they mean anything at all they mean
that the pirate is still on the job and couldn’t have been destroyed
by Fitzgerald. How on earth could he have possibly escaped? That’s
strange! The pirate certainly had a surprise up his sleeve for us
alright. I wonder what his secret is? We’re in a worse fix now than
ever.”
Without wasting any further time on conjecture, Heathcote rushed out
to the hangars and ordered a squadron of the largest type of bombing
machines to fly out three hundred miles east and search for traces
of the Montgolfier, and if possible pick up her survivors. Having
completed this task and witnessed the departure of the rescuing craft,
he went over to the post hospital. He knew the astonishing news would
materially affect Fitzgerald, and the fact that Miss Ingleton was safe
might prove to be the rallying point for his recovery.
Before he left for the hospital, however, Heathcote also dispatched
an officer over to Ingleton’s hotel with copies of the messages to
show to the former secretary of the navy. The clerk of the hotel told
the officer that Mr. Ingleton was at the general hospital, and the
latter went there. He was ushered into the waiting room. After he had
explained the urgency of his message, a nurse went to summon Ingleton
from the bedside of his wife. In a few seconds she returned with the
former secretary.
“We have just received word that your daughter is alive and well, Sir,”
said the officer handing copies of the message to him.
Ingleton read them over carefully and slowly, then with a sigh of deep
regret he exclaimed:
“Good Heavens! why didn’t I wait.”
He hurried back to his wife’s room and pushed the messages into Dr.
Harrington’s hands, saying:
“Here’s good news for your patient, doctor.”
Almost mechanically Dr. Harrington took the messages and glanced over
them. Then his eyes wandered slowly over to the recumbent figure in
the bed now strangely silent, and then, with the light of compassion
softening them, they turned upon Ingleton as the doctor, with a catch
in his voice, said:
“I’m sorry, dreadfully sorry, Ingleton, but these messages came too
late.”
CHAPTER EIGHTEEN
A flight of an hour and a half over the island-strewn waters of Hawaii
brought the rescuing airplanes to the scene of the latest aerial
outrage. The machines of the squadron were spread out in open formation
and had been flying at an altitude of ten thousand feet until they
arrived at a point approximately three hundred miles from Honolulu, in
the vicinity of the position given in the S. O. S. messages. Now they
spiralled down to a thousand feet and began a careful search of the
waters for signs of the Montgolfier or her survivors. The skies were
absolutely void of other craft.
After cruising about for a few moments, a number of small objects were
discerned on the water, and the commander of the squadron ordered
his machines to alight near them. The order was quickly obeyed, and
shortly afterwards the plane taxied up alongside what proved to be the
lifeboats of the airship Montgolfier. There was no sign of the airship
itself. Undoubtedly it had sunk.
After a quick survey of the situation the commander of the squadron
decided there was ample room in the bomb chambers of the huge
airplanes to carry all the passengers and crew of the Montgolfier back
to Honolulu, and the task of transferring the survivors from the boats
to the airplanes was quickly accomplished.
This done, the machines started back on the flight to Honolulu, which
was accomplished in a little less than two hours. On arrival there,
special care was taken of the women passengers who were suffering quite
a little from the trying experience, followed by the long exposure in
the small open boats and the flight back to the Hawaiian capital. While
this was being done the captain and officers of the Montgolfier were
escorted to the office of Commodore Heathcote, where the captain told
the story of the loss of his airship.
It was a story similar in detail to the previous attacks made by
the pirate. It left no doubt that the airplane which attacked the
Montgolfier was the same that had destroyed the Langley and Wilbur
Wright, and had supposedly been sunk during the battle with the
squadron of Commander Fitzgerald. Whatever doubt might have existed
about the identity of the perpetrator of the latest piratical attack
was quickly dispelled by the latter part of the captain’s narrative.
“While we were transferring our passengers to the lifeboats,” he
continued, “the attacking airplane, which had landed on the surface of
the ocean, taxied over to us. As soon as it came alongside, a door in
the cabin body opened, and a tall, dark man appeared in the doorway and
began to talk to me. He wore very heavy flying clothes, but no helmet.
He was a rather good looking chap, and although his flying clothes made
him look somewhat bulky, I got the impression that he was slim and
lithe and undoubtedly very strongly built. His features were dark, and
his skin had an olive tan. His eyes were coal black, and so was his
hair. I caught one view of him side face, and he had rather an aquiline
nose. While his features were very sharp, there was nothing cruel about
their aspect. He seemed to be of a studious rather than active nature,
although he was the boss of the pirate machine.
“He asked me several questions about the Montgolfier, what kind of a
cargo we carried, and then some general questions about the news in the
United States. After a short conversation along these lines he said to
me:
“‘You will be alright, Captain, Honolulu received your S. O. S.
message, and they will be sending some rescue craft out here to you
pretty soon. When you get back there, if they ask you about me, you can
tell them that I am the same fellow that sank the Wilbur Wright and
the Langley. I don’t want to leave them in doubt about that. You know,
Captain, I’ve just played quite a joke on them. They sent a squadron of
airplanes out a few weeks ago to fight me. I played around with them
for a little while and had a lot of fun. I carried it further than I
had expected to though, and one of them got a hit on our machine, but
it did not do much damage.
“‘I decided not to play any further, easily made my getaway. The damned
fools thought they had sunk me. Now I am back on the job, and they
will never be able to stop me from carrying out my plans and desires.
I am the king of the Pacific airways and I intend to be monarch of the
entire aerial world before I’m through. I am sorry I was compelled to
shoot down three of their machines, but that could not be helped. I am
master of the situation and intend to dictate my own terms before I
retire. They cannot successfully fight me and they might as well know
that fact now as later.’
“That was about the gist of his conversation. He was anxious that I
should get his meaning clearly. In fact, he asked me whether I had any
doubt what he wanted me to tell you. When I told him that I understood
him thoroughly, he started to go into the cabin, but hesitated a moment
and then said to me:
“‘By the way, Captain, they may ask you about my lady passenger when
you get to Honolulu. Her name is Miss Mary Ingleton, and she is a very
old friend of mine, that’s why I asked her to accompany me on my little
pleasure flights. You can tell them that she is very well, indeed, and
is enjoying herself immensely.’
“That was all he said. I started to ask him some questions but he went
inside his cabin abruptly. A few minutes later his ship taxied away
and waited until we had transferred all our passengers and crew. As
soon as we were through, he signalled to us to stand off away from the
Montgolfier. There was nothing for us to do but to obey this command.
Immediately afterwards his machine moved over alongside the disabled
airship, and some of the crew went aboard. It was not long before
they began to pass out some parts of the cargo. As soon as they had
satisfied themselves they put off about a hundred yards and opened fire
on the Montgolfier, which quickly sank. Without any further ceremony
the airplane then took off and quickly disappeared at terrific speed.”
“Did you see Miss Ingleton at all while the pirate was talking to you?”
asked Heathcote.
“No,” replied the captain.
“Did he say whether he had her aboard or not?”
“No. He did not mention her name except in the manner I have told you,”
said the captain.
“Did you see any other members of the crew?” required Heathcote.
“No,” came the reply, “that’s all I saw, but it was more than enough
for me.”
CHAPTER NINETEEN
From the unfathomed depths where lies the mythical locker of Davey
Jones, the pirate came back to renew his depreciations over the clear
expanse of the Pacific Ocean. His return was more than astonishing, it
was cataclysmic. It took the world completely by surprise and left it
aghast, helpless, but still infuriated.
What manner of man was this who could so easily flout the power of
organized government and laugh at its efforts against him? What hidden
powers did he possess that made him invincible in the struggle with a
whole world risen in anger against him?
There was no doubt about the pirate possessing some remarkable secret.
The unprecedented incidents in his meteoric career of crime amply
proved this. How could he be dealt with and brought within the power
of the law? That was the problem that had to be solved. It was evident
that the steps had already been taken against him had proven woefully
inadequate.
The new situation resulted in numerous conferences among the various
leading government officers. It was complicated by the fact that most
of the squadrons which had been established on the various Pacific
islands to aid in hunting down the pirate had been disbanded and
returned to their bases in the United States after Fitzgerald had
reported the supposed death of the pirate. Now there were but two
squadrons left in the Pacific waters that were at all adequate to
cope with the murderer, and these lacked sufficient speed to make any
impression against him.
It was about this time, however, when the problem appeared to be
impossible of solution that something occurred which gave the
government officers a new line to follow in their action against the
pirate. It came as the result of part of the program adopted at the
conference held in Washington immediately after the pirate had made his
first appearance so memorable by destroying the airship Langley. At
this conference George Cowl, Secretary of the Department of Air, had
suggested that careful investigation should be made to discover whether
any aircraft manufacturer had received orders to build the machine and
also if possible to discover the mode of transportation to the Pacific.
This, he thought, might help in the task of locating the pirate’s base.
The proposal had been adopted, and operatives were assigned to running
down every available clue, under the command of Captain Charles J.
Somers, chief of the Secret Service.
Now after many months of intensive work, the first fruits of the
investigation became apparent, and Captain Somers was able to render
a preliminary report. His men had been divided into two sections, the
first detailed to make a thorough canvass of the aircraft manufacturing
companies, and the other to trace the movements of the pirate in the
Pacific prior to the establishment of his base.
The canvass of the aircraft companies had disclosed the fact that about
eighteen months previous to the advent of the pirate over the Pacific
Ocean, a series of orders had been placed with different manufacturers
for airplane parts of special design. The specifications of each part
were included with the order, and in each case instructions were given
to make delivery to a warehouse in San Francisco upon completion. By
careful reconstruction, based upon these reports, it was found that the
parts fitted together into a flying boat that corresponded in a general
way to the descriptions given by those officers who had encountered the
pirate.
There was this important point, however, the theoretical machine
constructed from the details thus gathered had several important parts
missing. Also the closest inquiry failed to produce any knowledge or
information regarding the engine. At that point the investigation
came to an abrupt halt. An examination of the various parts and the
specifications merely showed the pirate had constructed a cabin
airplane of sheet tungsten-steel with retractible wings. The wings were
so arranged that they folded closely up to the side of the fuselage, in
collapsible style, when the machine was not in flight. A locking device
kept them rigid in flight.
Moreover, the most peculiar thing about the theoretical machine was the
fact that there was no apparent provision made for the emplacement of
the engine or engines which the pirate used to give his actual machine
its prodigious speed. In the trailing edge of the wings, however, there
were two fairly large circular holes that could be used as housings for
the propeller shafts.
The second detail of operatives had picked up the trail in San
Francisco from the address to which the airplane parts had been
delivered. Weeks of detailed investigation had followed. Then by
carefully dovetailing together the facts obtained, the secret service
men were enabled to construct the story of the pirate’s movements
immediately preceding his advent over the Pacific airways. In outline
the story was as follows:
In April, 1952, four men arrived at the warehouse in San Francisco
and took charge of the large cases that had been delivered there. A
tall, slim, dark man, was apparently the leader of the party, for it
was he who gave all the instructions for delivering the cases which
were addressed to him under the name of Joseph W. Devant. As soon as
he had checked up the number of cases he had them re-labelled, then he
told the warehousemen to have them shipped as freight in his name to
Honolulu on the steamship Chosen Maru, which sailed the same week.
Carrying the investigation further, it was discovered that this man
Devant and his three companions were passengers on the Pacific mail
steamship Nippon which sailed for the East from San Francisco on the
last Saturday of April. They took with them as baggage several large
cases that were heavily insured. These cases were marked with complete
instructions regarding the manner in which they were to be handled,
and bore bigger labels upon which was inscribed in large letters:
“Scientific apparatus. Handle with care.”
Picked up from this point the story showed that during the voyage of
the Nippon Devant in casual conversation with the officers of the ship,
had declared that he was on a scientific expedition that was about to
engage in meteorological investigation in the various Pacific islands.
Upon arrival in Honolulu the cases from the two ships, the Chosen Maru
having arrived a few days previously, were stored away, and Devant went
around the port in search of a suitable schooner. A few days after his
arrival he bought the 500 ton schooner Hilo and signed up the Kanaka
crew that had been aboard her. The cases were then placed aboard from
the storage warehouse, and the schooner sailed away with Devant and
his white companions acting as navigators. They did not comply with
the port regulations before leaving, and there was no record of their
intended destination.
From this point all traces of the expedition vanished. It had already
been listed as a total loss. The schooner Hilo had not put into any
known port or island, nor had it been sighted by any other craft.
Such was the report of Captain Somers, which he delivered to Secretary
Cowl shortly after the pirate had made his dramatic return to the
Pacific airways. Cowl read it over very carefully several times and
asked Somers a number of questions in connection with it. Then after
further consideration he said:
“There is no doubt in my mind that Devant is the pirate. Did you get
any line on him personally?”
“No”, replied Somers, “The name Devant is undoubtedly an alias, but we
were unable to get any further information about him.”
“Well,” added Cowl, “your investigation is conclusive, to say the
least. The cases undoubtedly contained his airplane, while the other
cases then he took with him the Nippon probably contained the parts for
his engines and other apparatus he had designed or needed.”
“That’s my opinion, too,” agreed Somers, “We tried to learn something
about his ancestry, but so far have not met with any success. I have
told our men in the Pacific to continue their investigation into the
movements of the schooner Hilo, in the hope that we might get some
trace of her. Meanwhile the men in this country are following up their
investigation by making inquiries at the place from which Devant sent
his orders to the aircraft manufacturers. In this way we hope to get a
line on his antecedents. I have issued explicit instructions to my men
not to pass up a single chance, no matter how unimportant it may seem
to them.”
CHAPTER TWENTY
In Honolulu the greatest consternation prevailed. The return of the
pirate over the airways had completely disrupted the service of its
airport, which was the most important in the whole Pacific Ocean,
because of its central location. The destruction of the airship
Montgolfier came at the moment when the confidence of the commercial
aerial transport companies had just been completely restored through
the report issued by the government to the effect that the pirate had
been killed.
Now chaos again ruled the air. Every company had cancelled its
schedules, and the only transportation to and from the islands was
by means of the slower mode of travel afforded by steamships. The
government officials were somewhat at a loss how to deal with the
unprecedented situation. Their chances of bringing the pirate to
justice were apparently very meagre, particularly as there were now
fewer government aircraft units in and about the islands than ever
before.
It began to look as though the only way to deal with the marauder lay
in the destruction of his base. Without a base to operate from the
advantage he enjoyed in the air over all other types of aircraft would
be destroyed. This view had rapidly gained the uppermost support of
the government authorities and it formed the subject of an exchange
of ideas, by cable, between the officials in Washington and Honolulu.
After considerable discussion it was finally decided to commission
every available naval craft in Pacific waters to a detailed search of
the lesser known islands in an effort to discover the point from which
the pirate operated.
Commander Fitzgerald was now rapidly convalescing in the post hospital.
His illness had been chiefly due to mental causes developed by exposure
and worry. The news that Miss Ingleton was alive and well had been
just the tonic necessary to set him on the road to recovery. But as he
was not expected to be in a condition to resume his command for a long
time to come yet the aerial forces of the government assigned to the
duty of attacking the pirate and policing the airways, had been placed
in charge of Wing Commander Emerson, who had been Fitzgerald’s chief
lieutenant.
A new plan of attack was adopted and put into operation. It involved
using the two squadrons of battleplanes at Honolulu solely for police
duty. These squadrons were instructed to keep the airways open as far
as possible. It was decided that other squadrons would be dispatched
to the Pacific to aid in this purpose. They were only to give battle
to the pirate in case he was sighted, but were not to go outside their
prearranged zone of patrol. The carefully detailed plan for searching
the pirate out and attacking him had been abandoned because it was
conceded that his superior speed and maneuvrability made aggressive
tactics impossible.
In other words the offensive had passed from the air to the sea for the
time being, so far as the government forces were concerned. The naval
craft under orders of Captain Smith, the commandant of the Hawaiian
naval district, were assigned to the duty of locating the base from
which the pirate operated. As soon as any of the vessels had found this
base, their instructions were to attack it, destroy everything within
it connected with the pirates’ enterprise and take prisoner any one
found upon the island.
Practically every vessel in the Pacific fleet was secretly detailed
to this duty--battleships, cruisers, light cruisers, destroyers,
torpedoboats and auxiliary craft. Even submarines were put to work.
Each division was given a certain section of territory to cover and was
told to land upon and search every unimportant island within it. In
addition to this the commanding officer of each vessel was instructed
to make a detailed survey of each island visited and gather whatever
information of a scientific character was obtainable. The latter
instructions were, of course, apart from the main object of the plan,
and were issued with the view of obtaining as much as possible out of
the expedition.
In such manner was the new machinery for hunting down the aerial
buccaneer set in motion. The experts in the Navy Department, after
carefully examining the reports of the pirate’s previous activities,
had calculated that the radius of his operations was limited to
approximately two thousand miles. Taking the general location of his
attacks upon the airships as a center, they had divided the circle
within the 2,000 mile radius into six different zones. These zones by
a strange coincidence naturally included six groups of mid-pacific
islands. The naval patrol vessels were therefore divided into six
divisions, each division assigned to a specific group of islands as
follows:
Division No. 1.--America Islands.
Division No. 2. Hawaiian group.
Division No. 3. Phoenix Islands.
Division No. 4. Gilbert Islands.
Division No. 5. Marshall group.
Division No. 6. The Carolines.
The task of searching these zones thoroughly was commenced immediately
with every available naval vessel. The forces employed were augmented
as rapidly as other war-vessels could be rushed to the scene. Then
for two weeks the six divisions of the naval patrol went about their
task of searching the innumerable smaller islands without any concrete
result. Suddenly one morning the light cruiser Farragut of the second
division, which was steaming in Latitude 28 and the 180th meridian
of longitude, sighted an open boat with what appeared to be a shirt
hoisted upon an oar. Captain John B. Moore, commander of the Farragut
altered his course in order to pick up the boat. As the cruiser drew
closer to it he made out the name painted on the stern of the small
boat, through his glasses. It read: “Hilo Honolulu.”
“Hilo,” he mused. “Let’s see, that was the name of the schooner that
was used by the man Devant who was supposed to be the pirate. This may
be the boat from that missing schooner, and if it is, we have made a
real find.”
Ten minutes later the cruiser drew up alongside the small boat. Inside
it was the figure of a man laying prone along the keel beneath the
seats. An oar had been fastened to the center seat and a shirt was
attached to it, evidently to act as a sail. A boat was lowered from
the cruiser. It’s crew rowed over to the drifting boat and quickly
lifted the man out of it and then rowed him back to the cruiser. He was
still alive but exhausted. After a few hours of medical attention on
the cruiser, the man began to show signs of returning consciousness.
Presently he had recovered sufficiently to take an interest in his
surroundings.
“Where am I,” he inquired feebly. “What ship is this?”
He was told, and then asked who he was and where he came from.
“Take me to Honolulu as quickly as you can, it is very important,” he
replied.
“Are you a survivor of the schooner Hilo that sailed from Honolulu with
Mr. Devant’s expedition?” asked the captain.
“No,” replied the man.
“Why do you want to go to Honolulu then?”
“I am very tired. Please don’t ask me any more questions just now.”
“But why do you want to go to Honolulu? Are you in any way connected
with the aerial pirate who has been attacking airplanes?”
“No! but I’ve just come from his base,” replied the stranger weakly.
A moment later, overcome by the strain, he again lapsed into
unconsciousness.
CHAPTER TWENTY-ONE
For three days the cruiser Farragut steamed steadily forward until the
island of Oahu hove in sight. During those three days the constant
care, coupled with the restful influence of the voyage, had proved most
beneficial to the stranger who had by now practically recovered from
the effects of his exposure. The captain of the cruiser had refrained
from any attempt to question the man until he was convinced there was
no further chance of a relapse. The circumstances surrounding the man’s
rescue, together with his statement that he had just come from the
pirate’s base, were sufficiently important, the captain thought, to
warrant him in taking the man to Honolulu.
On the morning that the Hawaiian capital was practically in sight, the
captain decided it was time to ascertain the identity of the stranger.
With this purpose in view he had him brought to his cabin, and then
asked him who he was.
“Where are you bound?” parried the man, somewhat suspiciously.
“We are going to the Pearl Harbor naval station,” replied the captain,
“in fact we’ll be there in a few hours from now.”
“That’s fine,” said the stranger, his face brightening visibly, “I want
to thank you very much, captain for your kindness I’ll tell my story
to the authorities ashore as soon as we arrive there. Have you been
looking for the pirate?”
“I don’t want you to tell me anything you don’t wish to,” resumed the
captain, “but don’t you think you ought to tell me who you are so that
I can get you to the proper authorities without delay as soon as we
arrive?”
“Why yes, Captain, I’ll tell you,” he replied. “My name is Howard
Redmond. I was the second officer of the airship Wilbur Wright that was
destroyed by the pirate.”
The effect produced by Redmond’s simple statement could not have been
more pronounced under any circumstances. It took the captain and the
officers who were present in his cabin completely by surprise.
“Good Heavens, man,” exclaimed Captain Moore, “you were reported
drowned. How on earth did you get to the pirate’s base?”
“Well, it’s a long story, captain,” replied Redmond, “but it’s a good
thing that I did get there, because I’ve got information that we
possibly could not have gotten in any other way. How much time have you
got before you reach your anchorage?”
“I expect to be there in three hours,” said the captain.
“That will give me time to tell you before you go to the bridge,” began
Redmond. “I will tell you how I got to the pirate’s base, captain, but
you must excuse me if I keep part of the story for the authorities
ashore.”
“Oh, that’s perfectly alright,” said Captain Moore, “but quite
naturally we are very much interested in anything that you feel you can
tell us. By the way, where is the pirate’s base?”
“You were not very far from it when you picked me up, captain,” replied
Redmond. “It’s on a little island known as Patrocinio which is located
about 170 East and 28 North. It’s right on the end of the Hawaiian
archipelago. You couldn’t have been more than two hundred miles away
from it at the time you found me.”
“Good God! why didn’t you tell me that before? I could have gone right
there and finished that bird for good,” exclaimed the captain. He was
plainly angry at learning how close he had been to the object of his
quest without knowing it. His anger grew as he rapidly realized the
wonderful chance he had missed to fulfill his mission.
“Wait a minute, captain,” cautioned Redmond quietly, “it’s a good thing
I didn’t tell you, otherwise nobody would have known where the base was
located.”
“What do you mean?” queried the captain sharply.
“Well, sir, you don’t suppose the pirate, knowing what the result of
his capture meant, would pass up any chance to protect himself, do
you?” asked Redmond in reply. And without waiting for an answer to
his question, continued. “No! Well he hasn’t. He is engaged in a very
risky business and he knows it, and he knows the consequences of his
capture. He hasn’t passed a single chance up that I know of. That
island is completely surrounded by a wide field of submerged mines. If
you had gone there, captain, your ship would have been blown sky high
before you knew it, and then of what good would that have been?”
The latter question was too much for the captain who simply gasped in
his astonishment. The explanation, however, had completely mollified
him.
“I would never have thought of that,” he said simply.
“No,” continued Redmond, “I knew you wouldn’t, that’s one of the
reasons I didn’t tell you. There’s a lot of other reasons that I can’t
tell you about just now. Well, to get on with my story. I’ll tell
you how I happened to get to his base. When the pirate attacked the
Wilbur Wright I was on the observation platform on top of the envelope.
I stayed there watching him while our people were transferring the
passengers. I was very much interested in the unusual appearance of his
machine and was looking at it through my glasses.
“I stayed there too long.
“When he first came up to us he opened fire with his forward gun,
and two of his shots went right through our envelope. One of them
penetrated number four ballonet, releasing the helium gas, and the
other struck the stairway running between the navigating room and
the observation post, carrying part of the stairway away. When I
started to go down I discovered this. Without trying to climb down the
wreckage, I went back to the observation post and walked along the
promenade deck on top of the balloon to the passenger elevator shaft. I
thought it would be easier to walk down the stairs around the shaft. I
was doomed to disappointment again, because I soon found that the shaft
had been injured by the second shot.
“It looked as thought I would have a tough time getting down. I went
back to the observation post and started down the accommodation
stairway there. After considerable difficulty I managed to get down
over the wreckage. Of course this took considerable time because I
had to go down practically hand over hand. I had to do it slowly
and carefully, by sense of touch, as all the lights inside the ship
had gone out. A slip would have meant a ninety foot drop inside the
envelope.
“By the time I reached the navigating cabin all our passengers and
crew had left and were in the lifeboats. They had pulled away from the
airship some considerable distance. I saw the pirate’s airplane on
the surface near one of the boats, and presently I saw someone step
over from the boat to the airplane. I found out later that it was Miss
Ingleton.
“In the meantime I was in a pretty bad predicament. There was not a
boat left on the airship, and our lifeboats were too far off for me
to swim over to them. I didn’t know what to do. I was not certain
how long the buoyancy of the remaining helium gas would keep the
airship afloat, and then I remembered that the report we had received
by wireless had stated the pirate sank the airship Langley after the
passengers had left that ship. I was afraid he might do the same thing
with the Wilbur Wright before I could find some means of getting off.
“While I was still undecided what to do the pirate’s airplane began to
move away from the lifeboats. I watched it a few moments, and then saw
that it was coming toward the airship. I went aft to the baggage room
and watched through one of the small portholes there. The airplane came
right up alongside the Wilbur Wright with its wings folded up. Three
men got off and came aboard the airship.
“After a little while I saw two of them return to the place where the
airplane was holding on and pass some packages out. I immediately
jumped to the conclusion that they were picking out the valuable parts
of our cargo and putting them aboard the airplane.
“While I was watching this I suddenly heard a noise in the baggage
room. I was standing behind some large trunks and couldn’t be seen from
the doorway. I looked around the edge of one of the trunks and saw one
of the men from the airplane moving about inside the room. He was still
attired in his heavy flying suit and wore a helmet, with a chamois face
mask. His goggles were pushed back on his forehead. He walked slowly
over to where I was standing, looking the baggage over carefully as he
came.
“I did not dare to move. Looking down I saw a piece of metal pipe at my
feet. I stooped down carefully and picked it up for use in case I was
attacked. Then suddenly an idea occurred to me which I thought might
give me a chance to get off the ship. I figured out quickly that I was
doomed to die like a rat in a trap if the pirate opened fire and sank
the airship after he had finished rifling the cargo. I decided that if
anyone was to be lost it should be one of his crew instead of me.
“I waited as patiently as I could, watching for my opportunity. The
man in the flying suit came gradually over to the place where I was
standing. Soon he was passing in front of the trunks behind which I was
hiding. As he passed on the other side I sprang forward and struck him
on the head with the pipe I held.
“He went down like a log, without making a sound.
“I didn’t like the job at all, but I eased my conscience by arguing
with myself that it was a case of his life or mine, and that he was
a dangerous criminal who had taken part in jeopardizing the lives of
women and children. The deed was done now, and it was no time for idle
regrets. I set to work and stripped the flying suit, helmet and face
mask off him. Fortunately for me he was about the same size and build
as myself. As soon as I had got the clothes off him, I put them on
myself. I picked up a piece of baggage that I thought contained some
valuables, and walked along to the place where the airplane was moored.
“It was now that my supreme test came, because I knew the slightest
false move would betray me. I didn’t know a thing about the pirate’s
airplane, and it would be an easy thing for them to detect me.
Fortunately, however, another man from the airplane crew was still on
board, and I found him making his way to the airplane just as I came
along. I fell in behind him and decided to do just what he did.
“At the door of the cabin of the airplane a man was standing.
Afterwards I found out that he was the actual pirate. He was very
impatient, and as we came along he said:
“‘What the devil’s the matter with you, fellows. Do you think I want
to stay here all day, till the government ships come along? Get inside
quick.’
“The fellow in front of me muttered some sour remark, and I did the
same in a low tone. I really believe the pirate’s impatience saved me.
He was so anxious to get away that he didn’t pay any attention to us.
I followed the other fellow into the cabin. He went into the rear of
it and stowed away a piece of cargo that he was carrying, and I did
the same with my piece. Then he sat down on a seat that ran lengthwise
along the side of the cabin.
“There was another man sitting on the opposite seat, and alongside him
was a woman. I looked at her in astonishment, and then it suddenly
dawned upon me that it was Miss Ingleton from our ship. She was
looking very pale and somewhat frightened. I didn’t dare move or say
anything, I just waited and watched. They had given her a leather coat
to put on, and she held a flying helmet in her hands.
“The pirate had now sat down at the controls, and the fourth man was
tinkering about with some apparatus that proved to be the power plant.
Before I could take in my surroundings more completely, the propellers
began to revolve and in an incredibly short time we were in the air. I
looked at the air speed indicator and saw that it was registering 250
miles an hour, despite the fact that we were climbing. There wasn’t
a sound from the engine, in fact the only noise I could hear was the
whirr of the propellers. The man next to Miss Ingleton leaned over and
said something to her. She then put on the helmet and mask.
“I had been wondering why the pirate and his crew wore such heavy
flying clothes and face masks, especially as they were in a cabin
plane. I soon found out. We were climbing very rapidly. I watched the
altimeter, and to my astonishment found that forty minutes after we had
left the surface of the ocean we were at an altitude of thirty-five
thousand feet. It was bitterly cold. I could feel it even through the
flying clothes which were fur lined. The funniest thing to me, though,
was the fact that we experienced no difficulty in breathing. We had
no oxygen apparatus, and yet we were breathing as easily as though we
were at sea level, despite the rarified air in which we were flying.
I couldn’t understand it at all. Neither could I understand his reason
for flying at such high altitudes, unless it was that he had discovered
a trade wind that aided him in his speed, or that he wished to avoid
meeting government aircraft.
“After we had been going for a couple of hours, the two men in the
cabin in which we were sitting got up and walked over to the forward
part of the machine. I saw them take up some flasks that looked like
vacuum bottles. And then they began working near the power plant.
“I seized this opportunity and moved toward Miss Ingleton. I put my
finger to my mouth to caution her not to move or say anything. Then
leaning close to her I said:
“‘I’m Redmond, the second officer of the Wilbur Wright. Don’t give me
away. I’ll try to take care of you.’
“Before she could say anything, I went back to my place on the other
side and stretched myself along the seat, feigning sleep. I thought
this would be the best thing to do because I might be expected to
perform some routine duty about the ship that I didn’t know anything
about. I figured that if there was something that I should be doing,
they would try to wake me up and tell me to do it, and that would give
me an idea what it was that I was expected to do.
“Although I was pretending to be asleep, I kept the corners of my eyes
open. After a little while the two men came back to their seats. As
they passed me they both looked at me. One of them said.
“‘There’s that lazy devil Harrison asleep again.’
“That was a fine cue for me. I now knew what my name was supposed to
be, and fortunately I was keeping up the reputation of the man I had
killed.
“After two more hours of flying I experienced the slight sensation that
told me we were descending and I figured that we must be coming to the
pirate’s base. The other two fellows had gone to the forward part of
the cabin again, and the pirate was very busy at his controls. All of
the other three were looking out of the windows at the ground below.
“Very cautiously I edged over a little toward Miss Ingleton. As soon as
I was near her I whispered loud enough for her to hear:
“‘As soon as we land, I’m going to try and hide myself somewhere. I
want you to keep me informed of what is happening and to keep some food
for me if possible. I’ll come and see you whenever I get a chance, if
I’m successful in getting away.’
“She nodded that she had heard me, and I moved back to my original
position, still pretending to be asleep. It was not many minutes before
we landed on the water, inside a small coral reef that made a natural
harbor on the eastern side of the island. It could not have been better
designed for the purpose of the pirate.
“As the airplane came to a stop near a ledge of rock one of the men
came over and gave me a light poke in the ribs with his elbows and
yelled: ‘Get up you, lazy devil, we’re home. Take some of this stuff
ashore.’
“I was all keyed up for the test that now confronted me. I went over to
where the packages were stowed, picked up as many as I could carry and
leisurely walked ashore with them. One of the other men was in front
of me with some of the packages. I followed him into a crude hut that
had been erected about a hundred yards inshore and there deposited the
packages.
“The other fellow began to pull off his heavy flying clothes and
helmet, as they were terribly hot in that climate. I was almost
fainting with the heat myself, but I did not dare take mine off. I
muttered some excuse about what I wanted to do and went out. As soon as
I got outside, I took a quick glance at my surroundings. The island was
apparently of volcanic origin and was very rocky. I began to walk over
as slowly as I could in my excited state to a rock that was not more
than fifty yards away. There was a level patch of gravel beach facing
the little bay, and on this were two buildings, in addition to the hut,
that had been erected by the pirate and his crew.
“As soon as I got behind the shelter of the rock I paused again to
take in my surroundings. Some distance to the westward there was rough
hilly country rising to about five hundred feet. I peered around the
rock toward the beach and saw the pirate assisting Miss Ingleton
ashore. Two of the crew were making the airplane fast to a ringbolt in
the rock. The third man I had followed ashore was now returning to the
airplane in his ordinary clothes.
“It was an excellent opportunity for me, I thought. I hurriedly shed
the heavy flying clothes and began to run toward the hilly country,
carrying the clothes with me. I thought they might come handy if
the nights were at all chilly in the higher parts of the island. I
continued running for some time, glancing back now and then to see
whether my absence had been noticed.
“In the rough part of the island I was soon out of sight of the beach.
Then I slackened down in my speed and began to look around for a
suitable hiding place as temporary quarters until I could survey the
island thoroughly. I wanted to find a place where I could remain safely
without detection in case they began to look for me.
“On the southeastern side of the island I ran into some rather thick
tropical growth upon the hillside. I penetrated this, and after a
short walk I found a small depression in the side of the hill that
was well screened by the vegetation about it. There were a number of
cocoanut palms in this section and lots of banana plants. As soon as
I had prepared my hiding place I gathered some bananas and ate them
ravenously. I had not eaten since the airship was attacked about six
hours before, so I was very hungry. After I had finished eating I fixed
up my hiding place for the night.
“A short distance from the place that I had selected I found a small
spring which trickled away into a tiny stream to the sea. It looked as
though this would be as good a place as any I could possibly find on
the island. It was well sheltered, and there were food and water close
to it. Only by the closest search could it be located. It gave me a
great feeling of security, and I turned in for a good sleep.
“That’s the story of how I got to the pirate’s base. I certainly was
very lucky. Although I was missed that night, they didn’t make any
search for me until the next day, and then it was not a very careful
one. I heard them shouting, ‘Oh, Harrison, where are you?’, as they
looked around for a while, but they soon gave it up.
“I waited a couple of days before I ventured out of my hiding place.
During that time I lived on the fruit around me and the water from
the spring. On the third day I went out very cautiously and gradually
worked my way to the rock where I had first taken off my flying
clothes. From that point I made a more careful observation of the
pirate’s nest along the bay. For the first time I noticed the schooner
Hilo beached in a narrow inlet on the western side of the bay. I
subsequently found that she had been scuttled there.
“As I looked I saw the pirate and his crew at work on the flying boat.
They were apparently making some repairs. I was glad to see all four of
them busy because then I knew that they could not be looking for me.
It was then that I made a surprising discovery.
“I told you previously that I had observed two buildings along the
shore that had been erected by the pirate. Well, one of them resembled
a long rambling cowshed. While I was watching this particular day
I noticed a peculiar wisp of bluish smoke coming out of a chimney
at the end of the building. This attracted my attention immediately
because I could see no reason for a fire in that latitude. While I
looked a couple of men came out of the building and walked down to the
airplane. It was the first time that I knew the pirate had anyone else
on the island besides his crew, and I was really frightened because it
increased the chances of my detection, and I knew that others could be
put to work to look for me.
“While I was thinking the situation over I saw Miss Ingleton come out
of the other house. She stood still for a few moments, looking over the
bay, then she turned around and looked toward the center of the island.
I waited for the first opportunity and stepping outside the shelter
of the rock, I waved my arm, motioning her to come to me. She saw me
almost immediately, and I ducked behind the rock. She turned back and
looked toward the bay again, and seeing that everything was going on as
usual, started toward me, walking very slowly.
“I saw she had a book in her hand. As soon as she got within hearing I
said to her:
“‘Sit down on the other side of the rock where they can see you, Miss
Ingleton, and pretend you are reading.’
“She did this. Then I asked her how they were treating her. When she
answered me I could tell she was almost crying by the sound of her
voice.
“‘Oh!’ she said, ‘I live in constant fear. They are treating me
alright, but I feel uneasy. This pirate is a man I knew in Washington
who once proposed to me and I refused him. I am really afraid of him,
although he has acted perfectly so far.’
“‘His name is Levanter--Joseph D. Levanter’, she replied. ‘He was an
officer in the aviation service in Washington. He left the service
when I refused to marry him, and we wondered where he had gone. When
I refused him he told me that he had just done something wonderful
and that I would regret my action very much. At the time I didn’t pay
much attention to his threat but now it seems that he took me off the
airship to carry out that threat. I didn’t know who he was until we got
to this island and he took his helmet off. Then I recognized him and he
laughed at me.’
“‘What did he say?’ I asked.
“‘He didn’t say a thing. He just looked at me and smiled in a funny
way. I asked him what he intended to do with me. He said: ‘Do you
remember the last time we were together and what I told you?’ I was so
frightened I couldn’t look at him. I asked him again what he was going
to do with me. ‘Don’t worry, no one is going to hurt you,’ he said.
Then he left me and went away to the airplane to do some work.’
“I could readily see that the situation was very distressing to her,
although I could not see her because she was sitting on the other side
of the rock. Therefore I decided to change the topic, especially as
I was anxious to find how I stood and what the possibilities of any
search for me might be. I asked her.
“‘When did they find out I was missing?’
“‘It wasn’t until they got through with their work. Then they asked one
another if anybody had seen Harrison. That’s the name of the man you
killed on the airship.’
“‘What did they do then?’ I asked.
“‘One of them said: ‘Oh, that lazy devil has gone off somewhere. He’ll
come back.’ The next day they went out to look for you, but they didn’t
seem to be very much concerned.’
“This allayed my fears a great deal. Undoubtedly the man Harrison had
a very unreliable reputation, and it was a good thing for me. Later I
found out that they would have gotten rid of him before, but they were
afraid he might give their secret away.
“I discussed the general situation with Miss Ingleton, and we made
arrangements to meet at the rock every day at a certain hour in the
morning whenever possible, so that she could tell me what was happening
and anything that she might overhear. I promised to take care of her to
the best of my ability. I was on the island over two months, and it was
during that time that we made plans at our meetings for me to get away
from the island. During the two months I learned everything possible
about the pirate’s machine and plans with Miss Ingleton’s assistance.
“While he was away on his flights I went over and examined the schooner
Hilo. It was impossible to use her, as she had been completely
scuttled. This was done evidently to prevent the Kanaka crew from
leaving the island. It was the Kanakas I had seen working in the long
building.
“I did find that the lifeboat of the Hilo could be easily patched
up and made seaworthy, so I made up my mind to try it. I did this
while the pirate was away on his flights. Miss Ingleton helped me by
secreting tools that she obtained from the toolbox whenever possible.
She also carried food to the place every time she got a chance, so
that I would have supplies for my voyage. It was in this way that I
made arrangements to leave the island and bring the information I had
gathered to the authorities.
“It took quite a considerable time to repair the boat, particularly as
the time I had to work on it was very limited. I finally succeeded,
however, and got away in the middle of a night about ten days before
you picked me up. I hadn’t been able to get a compass or any other
navigating instrument, and through the first night I steered by the
stars alone. After that I steered by the Sun, and just let the boat
drift during the night. I was trying to make Midway Island, figuring
that once I got there I could get a schooner to take me to Honolulu.
I must have drifted way off the course during the night because I had
been going for ten days when you picked me up. It was lucky when you
came along when you did because I was about all in.
“The time I chose to leave the island was when I knew the pirate would
have to spend about a week repairing and overhauling his airplane. I
was afraid that if by any chance they discovered the boat was missing
from the old schooner----”
At this moment a quartermaster tapped on the captain’s door and
entering, said:
“Mr. Jones’ compliments, sir, we are now off the harbor.”
The interruption cut Redmond’s narrative short as the captain was
compelled to go to the bridge and give the necessary navigating orders
to bring his ship into harbor. Half an hour later the Farragut was at
anchor in Pearl Harbor.
CHAPTER TWENTY-TWO
Out of the realm of his recent adventures Howard Redmond stepped ashore
in Pearl Harbor from the captain’s gig of the cruiser Farragut. With
him came Captain Moore who had refrained from notifying the officials
of Redmond’s rescue, fearing that the pirate might pick up the wireless
message and so become aware of the fact that the location of his base
had been discovered.
Dramatically inclined, Captain Moore seized the opportunity of
presenting Redmond to the naval authorities in an effort to make it as
effective an affair as possible. He personally led the man whom his
crew had picked up on the Pacific Ocean into the office of Captain
Smith, the naval commandant ashore. There, assuming a grandiloquent
air, he announced in stentorian tones:
“Captain, here is the man who has just come direct from the pirate’s
base.”
Pausing, he watched for several seconds with satisfied enjoyment the
result produced by his announcement. He was just about to proceed in
the development of the dramatic situation, when Redmond, with graver
thoughts on his mind, broke in and said:
“What Captain Moore has told you, sir, is true, but before I tell you
about it, will you please instruct your wireless operator to send
the signal ‘QVT’ at the end of each sentence when he sends out his
daily news bulletin, instead of the usual word ‘stop.’ This is very
important, and I shall explain the reason to you when I tell you my
story.”
Captain Smith, after a few perfunctionary questions, issued the
necessary instructions to the operator in charge of the big wireless
station at the naval base. He then sent for Commodore Heathcote, the
commanding air officer of the Hawaiian district. When the latter
arrived Redmond began his narrative. He told in detail again the story
he had already related to Captain Moore. Then he said:
“The last time I saw Miss Ingleton I promised her that if I got away
safely to Honolulu I would get the naval station to send out the ‘QVT’
signal, so that she would know that I had arrived. That’s the reason I
asked you to do it. Levanter has a wireless receiving station on the
island and, knowing that Miss Ingleton has always been interested in
wireless, has permitted her to listen in each day in order to help her
pass the time away. You see, there is no sending station connected with
it, and he knew she could not send out any message that would endanger
his security. Therefore as soon as she gets the ‘QVT’ signed she will
know that help will be coming to her very soon.”
“If that’s the case,” said Captain Smith, “you may rest assured she
knows it already because the news schedule is on right now.”
“Is there anything you can tell us about the machine that Levanter is
using?” interspersed Commodore Heathcote.
“I can tell you pretty well everything about it,” replied Redmond.
“Can you suggest any means to successfully attack him?”
“Well, you can judge for yourself after I have described his machine
and his base,” continued Redmond. “I think it will be best if I tell
you all about the conditions on the island. It’s part of the story that
I didn’t tell Captain Moore, because I didn’t have time.
“In the first place I learned everything about his remarkable machine
from Miss Ingleton and my own observation during the short time I was
on it. Levanter was quite sure of his security and felt confident
that she could not get away from him and with a feeling of pride
occasionally told her some of the secrets of the airplane. He did this
because, at my suggestion, she took a great deal of interest in his
machine and asked him a lot of questions about it. Then she would tell
me at different times when I met her at the rock all that he had told
her.
“Just what he intends to do with Miss Ingleton I don’t know. He has
not said a single thing to her that would indicate his intentions
so far as I know, but she didn’t tell me very much regarding her
relations with him. He takes her with him on his flights every time.
He has insisted on that, but on the island, from what she has told me,
he does not attempt to molest her, or coerce her in any way. He is in
fact extremely courteous to her, and she is free to move about as she
pleases to any part of the island.
“Now, as far as the machine is concerned, it is designed in such a
manner that it can be flown at extremely high altitudes without any
dangerous effect upon the crew who are fully protected within the
cabin. The body is absolutely watertight and is strong enough to
withstand external or internal pressure to a very high degree. In fact
the strength of its plates affords armor protection against normal
attack. It is provided with collapsible wings. When these are folded
up and all the doors secured the machine automatically becomes a
submarine. It has compensating tanks inside that can be filled with
water to enable it to remain below the sea without moving.
“When leaving the air and plunging into the sea it goes under in the
same manner as the diving type of submarine, and the tail surfaces
act as fins, as does also the small projection formed by the folded
wings. Once beneath the sea, its compensating tanks permit it to remain
submerged in a stationary position, in the same manner as an actual
submersible. It is equipped with a telescoping periscope that can be
ejected from the forward gunpit.
“The real secret of the machine, however, is in the design of the
engine. It is used for flying, surface cruising, or propelling the
machine under the water. This engine is Levanter’s own invention and
was built to his special design by the men with him, in a secret
workshop. He employs liquid oxygen for fuel, utilizing the expansive
force of the liquid gas when it is released from its vacuum container.
After the gas has gone through the engine and has been transformed from
a liquid into a gaseous state it is then used for breathing purposes
in the cabin, whenever the machine is at unusually high altitudes, or
beneath the surface of the sea. This explains the reason why we were
able to breathe without difficulty while flying at an altitude of
35,000 feet. It also accounts for the manner in which the pirate was
able to keep beneath the surface of the ocean after his fight with
Commander Fitzgerald, which Miss Ingleton described to me in a very
thrilling manner.
“The engine is located right inside the cabin, near the controls.
Its power is transmitted to the propellers by means of gears and is
applied through a clutch. By the movement of a lever this clutch can be
disengaged, and the power applied to the marine screw at the end of the
cabin. The marine screw is used for cruising purposes, either on the
water or beneath the sea.
“Those are the general features of the machine itself. It is highly
efficient in design, and particularly so in its power. That is the
reason he can get such tremendous speed out of it. Miss Ingleton
told me he had boasted to her that in one test flight over a measured
course, running both against the wind and with the wind, the machine
had averaged a speed of 350 miles an hour. Apparently it is only the
strong construction of the airplane that permits it to withstand
the tremendous pressure at such a terrific speed. The cabin, being
airtight, relieves the crew from any ill effects that might result from
the rush of air at that speed, while the oxygen from the engine enables
them to breathe normally.”
As Redmond paused a moment in his description, Commodore Heathcote
broke in and asked:
“But how does he get the liquid oxygen for his machine?”
“I was just coming to that,” answered Redmond. “Of course, you must
understand that nearly all of this information I got second hand
through Miss Ingleton. She obtained it from Levanter by asking him
questions whenever she caught him in a boasting mood. The whole story
of his career on the island as I got it from her is practically this:
“He came to Honolulu with his machine boxed up in parts. There he
bought the schooner Hilo and shipped its Kanaka crew. Apparently he had
already chosen Patrocinio Island from the map, and the schooner had
sailed there. The island is about five miles long and approximately
two miles wide. As soon as he arrived he made a survey of the island
and decided it was suitable for his purpose. After he had sailed the
schooner inside the coral reef that makes a natural breakwater for the
harbor he got the Kanakas to rig up some tents ashore, and then had
them carry the packing cases on to the beach. When this has been done,
he put them to work, building the permanent log houses. At the first
opportunity during night time he and his crew ran the Hilo ashore and
scuttled her there, so the Kanakas could not leave the island. They
also stove in the lifeboat which I used.
“While the Kanakas were building the houses, Levanter and his crew were
assembling their airplane. Among the equipment they brought with them
was a complete distilling apparatus designed by Levanter. This was put
up in one of the houses. By his own process Levanter obtains alcohol
from the grass and other vegetation on the island. He used the alcohol
as fuel to produce electrical power for the chemical process that is
necessary for extracting the oxygen and later liquefying it.
“One of the two big buildings is devoted entirely to this apparatus.
In fact it is quite a laboratory. The tool and repair plant are also
located in that house. The other house is used for living purposes, and
the Kanakas live in the hut where we stowed the baggage that he takes
from the airships he shoots down.
“His condensing apparatus for the extraction and liquefaction of
oxygen is very remarkable and complete. Miss Ingleton had seen it in
operation, but she could not describe it to me very well. He obtains
his oxygen by means of the fractional distillation of liquid air.
In this connection he has a very remarkable cannon on his airplane.
Instead of using the ordinary high explosive, he utilizes liquid oxygen
with powdered charcoal, which gives far greater explosive force. His
shells are really vacuum containers for the liquid gas, and with the
aid of a very peculiar detonator he breaks down the vacuum and fires
the charge at the same time.
“Of course he is very sparing with his ammunition because he has to
make all he needs on the island. When he came there he brought a
considerable amount of metal suitable for the manufacture of his vacuum
containers, and one of the first things that he did was to construct a
large number of small but highly powerful mines that are filled with
the liquid gas. These have been submerged around the entrance to the
harbor.
“From each airship that he attacked, he has obtained as much metal as
he could get, and with it has constructed more mines, until now he has
practically encircled the island with them. This leaves him pretty
nearly secure from any surprise attack on the island by naval vessels.
The vacuum containers he uses to carry fuel for his engine serve their
purpose continuously and do not have to be renewed. That is pretty well
all I know about his equipment.
“He treats the Kanakas very well, and his men have trained them to do a
great deal of the routine work connected with the laboratory. They do
not know the game Levanter is playing, but think that he is engaged in
some great and important task, and their child-like vanity is tickled
at the work he gives them to do. When they asked him about the schooner
Levanter told them it was wrecked in a storm. He told them he could
get another to take them off the island when he had finished his work
there. In fact he has trained them so well that he leaves them on the
island when he goes out on his flights, without any fear that they will
damage any of his equipment. He has chosen one of them to act as chief
and he tells this man just what he wants the Kanakas to do while he is
away, and they do it.”
As he reached the end of his description, Redmond uttered a sigh of
relief and settled back in his chair. It was only a momentary rest,
however, as Captain Smith immediately asked:
“Where does Miss Ingleton live on the island?”
“In the same house with Levanter and his crew,” replied Redmond. “They
have partitioned off a room for her, and Levanter sees that she has
everything she needs. One of the trunks which they took from the Wilbur
Wright was found to contain feminine apparel, and they have turned
this over to her, and so far as I know she is not in want of anything.
One of the crew spoke insolently to her once, and Levanter happened to
overhear him. A great fight followed, Miss Ingleton told me, and the
man has been very civil to her ever since.”
“Did she ever tell you about her flight at the time of the battle with
Commander Fitzgerald?” inquired Captain Smith.
Before Redmond could reply, Arthur Ingleton arrived at Captain
Smith’s office. The latter had sent for him, knowing well that the
former Secretary of the Navy would be interested to hear first hand
information about his missing daughter. Ingleton came in just at the
moment Redmond was about to answer Captain Smith’s question. After
mutual introductions, Redmond continued:
“Yes! she did describe that to me. She told a very interesting story
about her experience. She didn’t know the airplane could be turned into
a submarine and consequently it was a very thrilling adventure to her,
although it almost gave her heart failure.
“She told me that she was very apprehensive the morning Levanter set
out. She had been on the machine the previous day when Commander
Fitzgerald’s squadron appeared and opened fire upon Levanter. The
latter had told her of his intention to go out the next day and meet
Fitzgerald and fight it out with him. He insisted that she accompany
him on the flight.
“‘I implored him to let me stay behind on the island,’ she told me, but
he said to her, ‘You don’t want me to leave you behind here unprotected
with these Kanakas, do you? Suppose we didn’t come back! What would you
do then, alone here with the natives?’
“She tried to persuade him again, she said, but it was in vain. He
compelled her to go with him. She was very excited and apprehensive,
particularly when Fitzgerald’s squadron was observed coming out of the
northwestern skies. As soon as the machines of the squadron were close
to them, she told me, Levanter came over to her and said:
“‘Mary, I want you to go outside the gunpit and wave to Fitzgerald.’
“‘Oh! you can’t be so cruel as that,’ she said she replied.
“‘You must do as I tell you,’ he said with a savage glint in his eyes.
“‘There was nothing else but to do what he told me,’ she said.
“According to her story she went out and waved to the other airplanes.
She did not know which was the one Fitzgerald was in, and she couldn’t
see any signs of a response from any of them. After a while Levanter
told her to come back inside.
“She did this willingly enough, she said, because she was very scared.
It was not long before she heard the firing from the other ships. There
was no sound from the guns on Levanter’s machine. This was because he
was using liquid oxygen explosive.
“It was then that she experienced the reactions which she told me
about. I shall try to repeat her words as nearly as I can:
“‘My heart was beating terribly,’ she said, ‘and I was so frightened
that I just simply shivered on the seat inside the cabin. After a
long, long time I felt the machine go into a giddy dive, and my heart
went into my mouth. I could bear the suspense no longer. I went to the
window and looked out. The sea seemed to be coming right up to us. It
looked as though we were falling into it.
“‘After a while the airplane straightened out, just when it seemed
as though we were about to plunge into the sea. The other airplanes
were coming after us, firing their guns all the time. It was really
horrible, and I was in perfect terror. A little later there was a dull
heavy sound when one of the shells struck our airplane and made it
shake violently. As I looked horror-stricken through the window our
machine went right into the sea.
“‘At that moment I experienced the most terrible feeling I ever knew. A
hundred thoughts passed through my mind so quickly I couldn’t realize
what they were all about. Suddenly something told me I was about to
die. The thought chilled me with horror, and I fell off the seat in a
dead swoon.
“‘How long I was unconscious I don’t know, but when I opened my eyes
again the horror of it all passed through my mind very rapidly. I
looked around with fear. I couldn’t see a thing. It was inky black all
around me. I lifted my hand in front of my eyes but couldn’t see it.
Then I felt around me to find where I was. Suddenly a terrible thought
passed through my mind and I cried aloud in absolute terror:
“‘Good heavens! I’m blind! where am I?’
“‘A terrible harsh voice near me replied:
“‘‘Don’t make a noise, you’re alright. You’re not blind. Keep still,
and you’ll be alright in a few minutes.’
“‘Where am I? Where am I?’ I cried.
“‘‘Shut up, will you!’ was all the answer I got.
“‘The time that I lay petrified with fear seemed like ages. I didn’t
know what was the matter, and the man who spoke to me had such a rough
voice that I didn’t dare speak again. I was afraid to move or try to
get up from where I was lying, although it was very painful on the hard
floor, because I didn’t know but what I might fall down in the darkness.
“‘After a long, long time, a faint greenish light began to come,
wherefrom I couldn’t tell. It increased very quickly, and I looked
around to find that I was still in the cabin of Levanter’s airplane.
I couldn’t understand it at all. In a very short time everything was
quite normal again, with as much light as we ever had there.
“‘Joe Levanter was sitting at the controls, and the other men were at
their stations. They didn’t look at all concerned. I got up slowly. I
was aching terribly from the fall and the hard floor. How long I had
been lying there I don’t know, and Levanter never told me.
“‘I walked over painfully to the window and looked out. The airplane
was on the surface of the sea, but I couldn’t see its wings. There
wasn’t another vessel or airplane in sight. While I was looking
Levanter said to one of the men:
“‘‘Go outside and see where the shot hit us, also how much damage it
has done. I think it must have hit one of the wings.’
“‘The man opened the cabin door and went out. He was gone quite a
while. When he came back he said:
“‘‘It hit us on the starboard wing and it has buckled one of the
plates. You’d better open up the wings and see whether they are
alright.’
“‘Levanter pulled a lever, and I saw the wings shoot out from the sides
of the airplane, then I heard a loud snapping sound, and they became
rigid.
“‘The man who made the examination went outside again and walked over
the right wing. He got down on his knees near the end of the wing and
examined it very carefully. From the window I could see a big dent
where he was stooping down. That must have been where the shell struck
the wing. After a while the man returned inside the cabin and said to
Levanter:
“‘‘It has made a very nasty dent in the plates but it hasn’t done any
material damage. The wing is not seriously injured, and I think it will
hold up alright!’ There was some more conversation, and in a little
while Levanter opened up the engine and took off. After three hours
flying we were back at the island again.’”
Redmond paused a moment and looked around, then he added:
“That was about the gist of the story she told me.”
CHAPTER TWENTY-THREE
Arthur Ingleton with the marks of his recent suffering deeply engraven
on his face, sat motionless while Howard Redmond related the thrilling
experience of his daughter during the historic battle in the Pacific
skies. It was the first concrete information concerning her that he had
received since she was taken from the lifeboat of the Wilbur Wright by
the aerial pirate. As soon as Redmond finished the dramatic narrative
Ingleton plied him with innumerable questions regarding his daughter’s
welfare and the conditions generally upon the island. Then after a
considerable discussion along these lines he asked in anxious tones:
“If we attack Levanter at his base, how can my daughter be protected.”
“Well, I’ve thought of that very carefully,” replied Redmond, “in fact
the question has been in my mind ever since I first got on the island.
It seems to me that the best way she can be protected now is for me to
return to the island and get into communication with her. When I left
I promised her that I would do my best to come back, if I got here
safely, and let her know what was going to be done. I can get back
there easily enough, I think. I have thoroughly explored the island,
and know every portion of it. My plan is that one of the cruisers take
me back to the island. The captain of the cruiser can arrange to arrive
off the island about midnight without any lights burning. He can steam
to within a mile of the southern coast, where there is a little cove,
without any danger from the submerged mines which do not extend so far
out on that side of the island. Then a boat crew can row me over to
the landing place on the shores of the cove. We can tow a smaller boat
behind us, which can be hidden on the beach, so that if it is possible
Miss Ingleton and I can use it to escape from the island.
“When I get back to the island I propose to go to the cave on
the southeastern section where I lived before. Then at the first
opportunity I shall go over to our meeting place on the rock and tell
your daughter of any plans we may devise for her rescue. What we have
got to do now is to agree upon some plan of attack.”
“Are you absolutely sure that Levanter does not know that you were on
the island?” asked Ingleton, “it seems strange to me that he should
not have taken more active steps to ascertain what became of his man
Harrison.”
“Well, he did,” replied Redmond, “but I didn’t tell you about it
because I wanted to let you know the more important details first. As a
matter of fact after my first conversation with your daughter he did
make a very complete search of the island.
“In this search he was assisted by the men with him. Fortunately for
me, I got word of his intentions from Miss Ingleton in advance. I
cleaned up my place about the cave, so that there was no evidence of
my presence there. Then I picked out one of the thickest trees I could
find. I climbed up into it and stayed there until they had passed
through my little grove. It was a very trying ordeal, but it was the
only way that safety lay for me. Believe me I stayed there for a
considerable time after they had departed. I wasn’t taking any chances.
“I learned afterwards from Miss Ingleton that they made a complete
and exhaustive search of every part of the island. Levanter seemed
to be very worried that Harrison might have escaped from the island
and informed the government authorities where his base was. He freely
confessed his fears to your daughter. That was why he made such a
complete search.
“There is quite a stretch of sandy beach on the western side of the
island, and during the day after her arrival Miss Ingleton learned that
Harrison was in the habit of going there to take a swim. She found this
out from Levanter while he was discussing the absence of Harrison with
his men. At that time they casually remarked that he had probably gone
there and would soon be back again.
“She told me about it when I met her the next day, and consequently I
went right over to that side of the island and took Harrison’s flying
suit that I had worn on the airplane, with me. As soon as I found the
beach I threw the flying suit down carelessly and left it there. I
figured that if they made a search of the island they would find it
there and might possibly draw the conclusion that Harrison had gone
there and had been drowned while swimming. It was the best chance to
explain his disappearance that came up, and it practically eliminated
the possibility of Levanter surmising that there was a stranger on the
island.
“It was a good thing that I did this because that is exactly what
happened. They were so afraid that Harrison would betray them that
they made a complete search of the interior of the island before they
went to the beach. When they were unable to locate him anywhere in the
center of the island they gradually worked their way toward the western
beach.
“There they found the flying clothes which they carried back with them
to the station. Afterwards, in discussing the situation, Miss Ingleton
heard Levanter advance the opinion that Harrison had been drowned. At
the time of their search, however, they did not take any chance on that
belief, because as soon as they had scoured the island Levanter ordered
the airplane out, and he and his crew took the air to search the waters
near the island, on the possible chance that Harrison might be escaping
in a boat of some kind. They thought it strange that he had not left
his other clothes about the beach.
“Because of the fact that he had been missing for three days by that
time they made a search for a considerable distance about the ocean in
every direction from the island, to make sure that he was not in a boat.
“I was convinced that I would be safe so long as I was not seen
anywhere on the island, and throughout the time I was there I was
very careful about my movements. I did not relax my vigilance at any
moment and was very careful to cover up every move that I made. Even
when Levanter was away on his flights I was very careful because the
Kanakas were still on the island, and I did not want them to see me.
Consequently the work I had to do on the lifeboat of the schooner Hilo
was accomplished under the greatest difficulty because I had to keep
one eye open for Kanakas all the time I was working.
“I think we can safely dismiss the problem of Harrison, as I am sure
that Levanter and his men are convinced he was drowned. In fact I
believe they have forgotten all about him by this time. I am equally
sure that Levanter is completely ignorant that I was on the island, so
we have the advantage over him in that respect. It only remains then in
my opinion to devise a plan to attack upon.”
“Have you got any suggestions to make that would help us to attack
him?” asked Commodore Heathcote.
“Well I haven’t thought much about it,” replied Redmond. “I’ve told you
practically all the main facts. I am not very well acquainted with the
military situation, but it seems to me that you would not stand much
chance against his machine with your present equipment, and personally
I don’t think the naval vessels would be of any help, if you are
considering to use them. But, of course, my opinion isn’t worth very
much, I’ll admit.”
“We might use naval craft to blockade the island and make it untenable
by a continuous fusilade of fire from all sides,” suggested Captain
Smith.
“The blockade itself wouldn’t interfere with his flying operations,”
interposed Commodore Heathcote, “and he could bomb the naval vessels.
There is no doubt the shelling would annoy him, but outside of a direct
hit on the supply plants, it wouldn’t be of any material value and it
might endanger Miss Ingleton.”
“That’s true,” replied Captain Smith, “but I believe it would worry him
to such an extent that he would not be able to carry out his raids on
commercial airships. He would either have to fight us at the island or
else move on to a new base. Have you any other plan in mind?”
“Well, yes, a tentative one,” said Heathcote. “On second thought I
think the naval cordon around the island would be a good idea under
these circumstances. We have now an excellent description of Levanter’s
airplane and in fact practically all the details concerning it. I
suggest cabling them to Washington and have the experts in the
construction bureaus of the different departments there devise some
weapon that we could use to fight his machine. As soon as we get this
from them we can establish the blockade around the island and attack
him with the new weapon. For instance, what I have in mind is this:
If he uses liquid gas for his explosives, there must be some chemical
weapon that would counteract the effect of such explosive and which we
could use successfully against him.”
“Why not place the blockade around the island anyway?” argued Captain
Smith.
“Well, the thought I had in mind was that such a blockade would tip
Levanter off that we knew the location of his base, and we are not
actually ready to attack him. Of course, if we did establish the
blockade he would realize we knew where he was located,” answered
Heathcote. “It seems to me that we can go ahead and make all possible
arrangements to meet and check his attacks on the commercial lines
until we are ready to fight him, and then go after him properly
organized and completely equipped.”
“Alright, I understand your point of view,” said Captain Smith, “but
nevertheless I am still convinced that the blockade would be extremely
useful. Even if we did not attempt to shell the island, our very
presence would worry him and limit the extent of his raids. Moreover
if he should leave the island we would know it immediately and could
wireless the fact, so that our aerial patrols could be on the lookout
for him and be ready to protect the commercial ships.
“In addition to this I think that Redmond’s plans to return to the
island could be more easily carried out with the assistance of the
blockade, and the chances of his getting Miss Ingleton off the island
would be a hundredfold better with the navy boats there than otherwise.
“We could arrange a system of signals with Redmond, so that he could
keep us informed of what was going on as soon as he learned anything
through Miss Ingleton. The blockade would not interfere in any way with
your plans to devise more efficient weapons to attack him with. It
would assist in keeping Levanter on the island.
“You must not forget that if when we throw the blockade around the
island, he should decide to go to another island and establish a new
base, it would be impossible for him to take his manufacturing and
repair plants with him, unless he made a number of very long flights to
and from the new island. If he did this, we could learn of it through
Redmond and also possibly learn of his new destination, and then we
could take steps to attack him there before he had a chance to fortify
himself.
“Personally, however, I think he will stay where he is until the very
last minute. He will not take any chance of moving to a new place where
we might get him more easily, at least that is my opinion. Such a
move would be too hazardous and too difficult to accomplish. He might
fly away and abandon his machine at some unknown place, if pressed too
closely at Patrocinio.
“Taking all these things into consideration, I am absolutely of the
opinion that the best move we can make is to establish an immediate
blockade around the island. We can take every possible measure of
defense to protect the naval vessels from bombing attacks, which I
don’t think will be very numerous, judging from Redmond’s description
of the difficulty he has in obtaining metal suitable for the
manufacture of the bombs. I am willing, however, to put the matter up
to the authorities in Washington and let them decide, although I am
equally willing to assume the responsibility for ordering the move.
In any case I think it will be a good thing to advise Washington
completely of the situation.”
At this moment Ingleton, who had been listening attentively to the
discussion, broke in:
“Whatever you decide, there is one thing I want to say. It is this: I
cannot stand idly by while my daughter is in danger. I am going to the
island with Redmond when he goes.”
“But Mr. Ingleton,” objected Redmond, “I think that would seriously
handicap our chances. You don’t know the island or the conditions
there.”
“I’ve made up my mind!” stated Ingleton firmly.
“I appreciate your anxiety and your feelings,” replied Redmond, “and I
hope you will excuse me for speaking frankly, because it is a question
of life and death for your daughter. You must pardon me, Sir, but you
are not as active as you used to be, and this is a situation that needs
vigorous action for success. In addition the chances of recovering your
daughter will be greatly lessened if we are discovered, and the more of
us are on the island the greater the danger of our being discovered.”
“I’ve made up my mind and nothing will change it,” declared Ingleton
with emphasis.
“Very well, Sir, if such is the case I must accede to your wishes,”
said Redmond. “I only hope that our mission will be successful.”
CHAPTER TWENTY-FOUR
For two long, weary weeks Mary Ingleton watched upon her island prison,
with a patience born of hope, for the news that would tell her of the
safe arrival of Howard Redmond at Honolulu. Day after day she sat in
the improvised wireless room with the receivers fastened to her ears,
vainly listening for the code word they had agreed upon before his
departure--the code which meant ultimate freedom for her and the longed
for return to her parents.
Her watch for this signal, though weary and lonesome, was actuated by
her keen desire to get back to her mother who was deeply distressed
when Levanter took her off the airship. She knew that her mother would
be worrying over her safety and that worry would materially affect her
mother’s health. This thought greatly depressed Mary and added to her
anxiousness to get away from the island.
Mary had little thought that a long captivity awaited her when she
agreed to leave the airship Wilbur Wright at the pirate’s behest; and
of course, she did not know then that the pirate was Joe Levanter, the
man she had refused to marry in Washington. Many times since then,
however, she had pondered over the momentous occasion and regretted
the actions she had not taken at that time. At the critical moment when
she was ordered out of the lifeboat by Levanter it seemed as though she
had done the best thing possible under the circumstances for everybody
on the airship. She did not then know what motive actuated the pirate
in ordering her to go aboard his airplane, and still less did she dream
that her compliance would mean separation from her family, and virtual
imprisonment upon an isolated island for many months.
Had she known these facts, she mused, she would have insisted that
her mother be permitted to accompany her, and she felt that Levanter
would finally have given in to her demands. Many times had she berated
herself for not having done this. Now, as she waited for the agreed
signal, all these thoughts came back to her mind with greater force to
add to her dejection.
Now that Redmond had gone, there came upon her for the first time
a true realization of the seriousness of her situation upon the
island and of its possibilities. While Redmond had been on the island
the thought of personal danger had never occurred to her. She had
automatically become accustomed to looking upon him as a protector in
case of need. Moreover the attitude of Levanter toward her had been
irreproachable. In a vague way she had occasionally been disturbed by
fears as to what her captor might do, but as yet nothing had occurred
that would indicate what his intentions were. She was his prisoner,
but he had been a most irreprovable jailer both in word and in deed.
This situation in particular had been responsible for the fact that the
thought of personal danger never occurred to her at any time during her
reflections upon her imprisonment.
For the first time in her life Mary felt that something was lacking in
herself. For the first time her dominant spirit of independence left
her. For the first time she experienced the feeling of helplessness.
These new and strange misgivings came upon her as soon as Redmond had
started out so bravely upon his mission. Within her heart there grew
a feeling such as she had never known before; a feeling she could not
define, but yet one which left her ill-content and perplexed.
It was a feeling strangely bound up with Redmond, and when in the grip
of it she frequently surprised herself conjecturing upon his fate. Each
time her mind reverted to Redmond her imagination painted a picture of
him in the open boat, upon the waters of the Pacific; a picture that
seemed to affect her mood and bring fears for his safety. Each day this
picture was re-drawn in colors more vivid and theme more ardent and
hopeless. Thus did she live in each day an eternity of alternate hope
and despair. Added to this was the constant fear that Levanter would
make the discovery that the Hilo’s lifeboat was missing and guess that
a stranger had been on his island base.
Then with that malice which the Fates seem to delight in visiting upon
human beings in distress the cloud of uncertainty that hung over Mary
was lifted only to bring her face to face with despair. Early in the
second week after Redmond’s departure Levanter came to her and for the
first time spoke about her presence on the island. There was something
in his manner and his attitude that sent a thrill of apprehension
through her.
“Mary,” he said. “For what reason do you suppose have I brought you
here?”
She looked at him in blank amazement. The suddenness and unexpectedness
of his question took her completely unawares, and she was unable to
reply. He watched her intently for several seconds, then without
heeding her silence went on:
“Shortly after you turned me down in Washington I made up my mind
that you would marry either me or no one. You little thought at that
time that you would ever be in this position, but I knew then what I
could do, and I was certain that sooner or later I would get you. Of
course, I did not know that you would make a trip on one of the Pacific
airships, in fact I had no idea of such a voyage, but that did not
make any difference, because I would have succeeded in getting you
eventually. Your trip on the Wilbur Wright only hastened matters.”
“Oh! I would never believe that you could stoop to that!” exclaimed
Mary passionately.
“Well of course, you may regard this as a stooping down affair. But I
rather think that I have risen to the height of a daring opportunity,”
replied Levanter.
“What do you intend to do with me?” demanded Mary, her anger overcoming
her fear.
“I am going to marry you!” he replied.
“Never! I will never marry you! Never!! I would sooner die,” declared
Mary with emphasis.
“Don’t be in such a hurry to die. Your life means infinitely more to
me than your heroic death might possibly mean to you,” said Levanter.
“Take your time and think it over. Do you really think you can oppose
my power?”
“I don’t know what you can do, and I don’t care,” exclaimed Mary,
stamping her foot in emphasis. “I will never marry you, never!”
“Well, never is a long, long time and may never come,” he replied, with
a sardonic smile. “You are a little obstinate just now, but you’ll soon
see the light.”
“You are just a brute, and I hate you!” The last remark of Mary wrought
a sudden change in Levanter.
From the forceful, dominating man who had successfully pitted himself
against the rest of the world, outlawed himself and resisted all
efforts to subdue him, he changed to the pleading attitude of a suitor.
“Now, Mary, don’t be cruel. I can’t bear to think that I am hateful
to you. I love you and you must be mine! Nothing in the world, not
even this power that I have and the riches it brings me, can make me
forget my passion for you. I would be willing to give it all up on the
condition!”
“I wouldn’t have anything to do with you under any conditions,”
interrupted Mary. “You have got me here in your power, but you can’t
make me do anything willingly. To me you will always be repulsive,
because I think you are a coward at heart.”
“But surely, Mary, you don’t want me to continue this work, do you?”
Levanter still pleaded.
“Don’t try to put the responsibility of your evil deeds on me,” said
Mary angrily. “You don’t have to commit these crimes, and you know it.
Nothing you say will change my mind about you, or about your proposal.
I won’t have anything to do with you, no matter what you promised.”
The steely determination which shone in Mary’s eyes stung and hurt him
to the point of madness. He shook with anger and anguish. Suddenly a
wave of passion swept through his frame. Lunging forward, he violently
grasped Mary in his arms and pulled her toward him. She struggled
desparately.
“You’ll do as I want you to do,” he exclaimed savagely.
In sheer desperation Mary slapped and scratched her captor. Their
interlocked figures swayed and wriggled in the room as Levanter,
actuated by the unreasoning passion that engulfed him, struggled
desparately to overpower Mary.
Suddenly in the midst of the struggle, just as the strength of Mary was
about to give out, the door of the room opened, and Walter Johnston,
the chief lieutenant rushed in. He was the man who had tried to kiss
Mary on the first day of her arrival on the island and had received a
violent blow from Levanter for his pains. He had been attracted to the
room by the sound of the struggle, and rushed to investigate. Taking
the situation in at a glance, he strode over and separated the two.
As Levanter released his hold on Mary he turned ferociously upon his
aide and aimed a terrific blow at the intruder. Johnston, fresh and
alert, easily avoided the blow and in turn planted one on the face of
his chief which sent the latter sprawling on the floor.
“What’s the idea?” asked Johnston. “You don’t think you are going to
pull anything over on me, do you? I’ll tell you right now that don’t go
with me. What I can’t do, you can’t do, chief, and that ought to about
settle it.”
Levanter slowly rose from the floor.
“This is my affair, Johnston.”
“Oh, no, Boss,” replied Johnston smoothly, “you’ve got it wrong. It’s
my affair, too. We sink or swim together, and what’s good enough for
me, is good enough for you. That’s only fair.”
“What do you mean?” asked Levanter.
“What I say,” replied Johnston, “you are trying to do something you
stopped me from doing, and that don’t go--see!”
While the two men thus disputed, Mary, with her hand over her
palpitating heart, stood in the corner, panting from her exertions
in resisting Levanter. Her eyes followed every movement of the two
men, and she listened keenly to each word that passed between them.
For upwards of half an hour they engaged in a rapid fire of violent
argument, then gradually the heat of the altercation spent itself. As
it subsided, Levanter said with a smile slowly growing upon his face:
“Let’s forget it, Johnston. If we quarrel we are lost. You don’t
understand the situation. Miss Ingleton is an old friend of mine, and I
asked her to marry me. The reason I stopped you from molesting her the
day she came here was because I was still waiting for her answer, and
I hoped to marry her. Now she has refused to marry me. So it’s no use
quarreling about her.”
“Well, that’s alright, you leave her alone and I’ll do the same,” said
Johnston.
Then turning to Mary, he added:
“You tell me, Miss, if he tries to interfere with you in any way.”
To this Mary made no reply, but she experienced a feeling of great
relief. The struggle she had just undergone with Levanter had left her
exhausted and had caused her great alarm, although it had awakened
in her a lively feeling of resentment and determination to fight for
her safety and honor to the very last. A hundred desperate thoughts
had been engendered in her mind while the altercation between the two
men was raging. She would plunge into the sea as soon as she got out
of the room. Then came the determination to kill Levanter with the
first weapon that came to hand, should he attempt to molest her again.
Finally she had decided she would destroy Levanter, his crew, and
herself with one of his liquid bombs.
Then the altercation between the two men came to an end, and its
outcome rent the curtain of her fears and disclosed the clear path
of safety before her. She realized that the bad blood that had been
stirred up between Levanter and Johnston spelled freedom from danger
for her, at least for a time, and she determined to be wary and never
be with either one of them alone, or go anywhere where one of them
could be alone with her.
She could therefore allay her fears for several days at least, allowing
for a reasonable time to hear from Redmond. Then should such time
elapse without hearing from him by wireless, she would know that he
had failed in his attempt to get to Honolulu, and then she could think
the situation over and make whatever plans were necessary under those
circumstances. Until that time she was now determined to compose her
mind and wait patiently and hopefully.
By the time these thoughts had revolved themselves in her mind she was
thoroughly recovered from her exertions and emotions. With a rapid but
cold glance at the two men, Mary turned around and walked out of the
room. She went into the wireless room. A glance at her watch showed her
that it was almost time for the news schedule of the naval wireless
station at Honolulu.
She sat down at the instrument table and picked up the receivers which
she carefully adjusted to her head. Then, after delicately adjusting
the apparatus in front of her, she picked up a pencil and began to
write as the news message came in.
Mechanically she wrote down word by word the first item of the
despatch, her mind following its import just as mechanically. As the
sentence terminated her hand had already began to write the word
“stop” which normally came at the end of each item. She had already
got the first letter of the customary word on the paper before her,
when suddenly she arrested the movement of her hand and listened more
intently. In place of the usual “stop” a new signal was coming. Within
her mind she repeated it as it came.
It was composed of three letters “QVT.”
The full meaning of the signal burst in upon her thoughts. Joyously she
pulled the receivers off her head, flung them on the instrument table
and with all the fervor of her soul exclaimed, “Thank God!”
CHAPTER TWENTY-FIVE
For several days after she had received the welcome wireless signal
which informed her of Howard Redmond’s safe arrival in Honolulu, Mary
Ingleton constantly speculated on the possibilities of her early escape
from her island prison. Ever since her terrific struggle with the
aerial pirate shortly before she received the wireless signal she had
been greatly perturbed. Would Redmond be able to get assistance quickly
and come to her rescue before Levanter tried to molest her again? Would
Johnston keep his promise and interfere against his chief, if Levanter
should again force his unwelcome attentions upon her; or would Levanter
succeed in placating his assistant by some arrangement and then renew
his attentions? These were the thoughts which ran successively and
repeatedly through Mary’s mind and disquieted her greatly. Her fears
were greatly enhanced by the persistency with which she dwelled upon
them, for the lack of anything else to do.
Since the incident with Levanter that was ended by the abrupt
appearance of Johnston, she had not been molested again. Levanter had
remained aloof from her and busied himself with the affairs of his
criminal enterprise. The repair work on the airplane that had been
started just before Redmond’s departure had not yet been completed, and
Levanter was busy each day superintending it. It included a complete
overhaul of both the machine and its engine.
While dwelling on the problems before her, Mary was considerably
worried that Levanter might at any moment walk over to the place
where the wreck of the Hilo was lying piled up on the beach and there
discover that the lifeboat of the schooner was missing. The more she
thought of this possibility the more worried she became, for she
felt certain that if the fact that the lifeboat was gone should be
discovered, Levanter would logically surmise that a stranger had been
on the island. She was sure that in that case the strange disappearance
of Harrison would again crop up in his mind and arouse his suspicions.
As she turned this problem over in her mind Mary tried to think of
some way of solving it. Suddenly an idea occurred to her. Why not get
hold of one of Levanter’s chemical bombs at the first opportunity,
plant it under the Hilo and blow the schooner to fragments? This done,
there would not be any possible chance of the pirate’s discovering the
disappearance of the lifeboat, and all fears on that score would be
eliminated.
No sooner had the idea occurred to her than Mary began revolving in her
mind a possible way of putting it into effect. In the first place she
did not know just how the bombs were operated. All she knew about them
was what Levanter had told her in a casual way at different times. She
knew that they were filled with liquid gas and that there was a special
detonating arrangement that broke down the vacuum of the container and
released the gas so rapidly that it emerged with terrific explosive
force. How this detonating device worked she did not know.
She fully realized that it would be extremely difficult to obtain one
of the bombs and very dangerous to place it underneath the Hilo in such
manner as to ensure the destruction of the schooner. Before she could
attempt this, therefore, she had to find out how to handle the bombs,
also if there was any way in which they could be exploded by a time
arrangement, so as to enable her to get away to safety before the bomb
exploded after she had placed it under the Hilo.
Having recognized these facts, she decided, after further thought on
the matter, that the only way to obtain the necessary information would
be from Levanter himself. In order to do so, she realized that she
would have to get on speaking terms with him again. This was extremely
repugnant to her, but she decided that it could not be avoided under
the circumstances. Therefore she made up her mind to submerge her
own feelings in order to achieve the purpose she had in view, which
was very vital to her safety and indispensable for her escape from
the island. She relied upon the quick return of Howard Redmond to
counteract any advances that Levanter might make after she had resumed
speaking relations with him.
Now that she had made this decision Mary waited until Levanter was in a
good humor and not pre-occupied with the repair work on his airplane.
At the first available opportunity she approached him and said:
“I have been thinking things over, and it seems to me that it is very
silly for us to be sulky. I am perfectly willing to be friendly with
you, if you will not try to interfere with me again as you did the
other day. Why can’t you promise me to act like a man and put an end to
this ridiculous situation?”
“What’s the idea?” asked Levanter in reply, “I thought you said you
hated me.”
“Well, you must admit that was your own fault,” replied Mary. “After
thinking it over I don’t believe that you were really responsible for
your actions then, so I am willing to forgive you, if you will only
promise not to do anything like that again.”
“I don’t quite understand you,” said Levanter suspiciously. “There must
be some reason for the sudden change in your attitude now. What is it?”
“Well, I am very lonesome here, and it is very unpleasant not to be
able to talk to anyone.”
Levanter began to thaw with this explanation, and he actually smiled.
Did she really mean what she said?
“Well, I think you are right to a certain point. I am glad that you
are at last beginning to realize that there is no escape from fate.
That makes things much simpler for us. I don’t see though why I should
promise you anything. I can say this however. I may be blamed for my
actions, but I don’t have to defend any motives. I love you, I have
always loved you, and I believe I shall always love you.”
“Well, I accept your apology,” said Mary. “But why can’t you forget
what you have just said? You know I don’t love you. I have said that
often enough for you to realize it. I have always been determined to
marry no one but the man I love. I don’t intend to marry anyone. Let us
agree to bury the hatchet, forget all these things and live amicably,
since I must stay on the island. But tell me, what are your intentions
toward me. Surely you are not going to keep me here all my life.
Surely, you don’t intend to live here yourself, do you?”
“I don’t know yet,” replied Levanter. “I haven’t made up my mind what I
am going to do. Why do you ask that?”
“Oh, I was just wondering what you intend to do. It explains my reason
for wanting to be on speaking terms with you again. I didn’t think that
you would live here forever. I felt sure that some time you would quit
this island, and of course I didn’t expect you to be so cruel as to
leave me here after you left. I was sure that when you did leave, you
would find some way to let me get back to my parents.”
“You can go back to them immediately if you promise to marry me,”
declared Levanter.
“Now, there you are again, returning to that forbidden subject,”
replied Mary. “Why can’t you agree to forget that. You know what my
answer is now.”
Suddenly, as she reached this stage in the conversation, an opening
occurred to Mary. She would dissemble her real feelings and hold out a
hope to the man she despised and hated. Intuitively she felt certain
that he would immediately jump at the possibility offered indirectly
to him and promise not to interfere with her again while she was on
the island. Then having obtained this promise, she could go about her
task of destroying the Hilo and lay such other plans to assist Howard
Redmond when he returned, as were possible under whatever circumstances
might develop. These thoughts flashed quickly through her mind as she
was talking, and with only a slight pause to go over them again and
make sure of herself, she continued:
“Of course, whether my answer will always be ‘No’, I cannot say at
the present, but you will not get me to change my mind if you keep on
forcing your attentions upon me, that is certain.”
Mary had angled well and caught her victim on the well prepared
hook. Like a fish Levanter rose to the bait and grasped it. The hope
contained in Mary’s simple statement arose before Levanter with all its
possibilities.
“I think you are right,” he replied slowly. “What I did the other day
was done in the heat of passion, and I was not really responsible. I am
very sorry and I hope you will forgive me.”
As he said this Levanter extended his hand toward Mary. She grasped
it and shook hands with him on the compact. She did it with an
apparent show of sincerity, but in her heart there was the bitterest
of feelings. She despised herself for doing it, and she still more
despised the man whose hand she shook. She consoled herself, however,
with the thought that what she had done was necessary to her own safety
and freedom, and that the treachery of the man who held her in his
power could only be overcome by stratagem on her part, much as she
disliked to employ it.
Following the conclusion of the compact, the two continued to converse
generally until Levanter was called away by the men working on the
airplane. Mary felt that it would be extremely unwise to question the
sky pirate on any matter concerning his enterprise so shortly after the
reconciliation with him. It would be much better to wait a few days
she thought and be extremely friendly with him until he was completely
disarmed regarding her intentions before she asked him any questions.
Otherwise, she argued with herself, he might guess the reason for such
pertinent questions and know that she had approached him solely to get
the information wanted.
And so several days passed by without further incident of any kind.
Each day Mary made it a point to chat with her captor on some trivial
subjects, in order to get him completely off his guard. Meanwhile she
had been thinking over the details of her plan. She knew that as long
as Levanter was busy with the repair work on his airplane there was
very little chance that he would go over to that part of the harbor
where the Hilo was lying beached.
As soon as the repair work was completed, however, there was every
possibility that he might go over there and discover that the lifeboat
was missing. Consequently there was no time to be lost in completing
her arrangements.
If she were successful in the task of destroying the Hilo she could
take similar steps against the remarkable airplane of Levanter. If she
could only shatter one of its wings, or damage its hull, it would be
impossible for the sky pirate to take the air again for several months,
while there was the possibility that the machine might be completely
wrecked. Even if it were only slightly damaged it would give Redmond
sufficient time to organize any help that he might need in getting back
to the island and rescuing her.
No sooner had this thought occurred to her than Mary began to debate in
her mind whether it would not be better to go right out and blow up the
airplane instead of the schooner Hilo. If the airplane were destroyed,
she argued, it would not make any difference whether Levanter
discovered that the Hilo’s boat was missing or not, because he could
not leave the island anyhow. If she succeeded in doing this completely
it would be a very important thing, and she might be able to do it
without attracting suspicion if she went about it carefully. In fact,
she continued in her mental argument, Levanter might think that the
explosion had been caused by a bomb left on the airplane.
Should she try to blow up the airplane or the Hilo? That was now the
all important question in her mind. If she made her attempt on the
airplane and failed she might not get another chance, and there was
a very great possibility of failure until she had learned how to
handle the bombs properly. In the event of failure through premature
explosion, or any other similar cause, both Levanter and his crew would
be extremely careful with the remaining bombs, particularly as to where
they left them, and her chances of getting another would be eliminated.
On the other hand if she made the attempt on the schooner Hilo and
it was unsuccessful, she felt certain that Levanter would attribute
the explosion to the washing up of one of his mines ashore, and
then she would have another chance to try again. Besides, she would
learn something from her failure if she did fail. If her attempt was
successful, Levanter and his men might still think that the explosion
was from one of the mines washed up from the sea. In that case she
would have sufficient knowledge in the use of the mines to make the
attempt on the airplane at the earliest possible moment.
About a week after Mary had made her reconciliation with Levanter the
opportunity she had been looking for arrived. She was conversing with
her captor, and he was in an exceptionally good humor. While she was
talking with him, Johnston came over and said:
“Say, Boss, we’ve used up all our supply of metal, we’ll have to get
some more somewhere for the extra vacuum containers.”
After the two men had discussed this for a little while Johnston left
and went over to the workshop. As Levanter turned back to her Mary
asked:
“Aren’t you afraid that one of the bombs might wash up from the sea and
explode?”
“Oh, no,” he replied. “There wouldn’t be any danger unless they were
thrown violently against some object. They have a contact detonator,
and as long as the detonator didn’t touch anything they would be
harmless.”
“Well, I’m glad to hear that,” replied Mary, “because I was a little
alarmed over it.”
“You needn’t be, there’s no danger,” declared Levanter.
“Well, you know that’s stupid of me,” said Mary, “I always thought that
bombs and explosive things went off with some kind of a fuse, some kind
of timing arrangement, if you get what I mean.”
“They can be made to explode that way,” replied Levanter, “but my bombs
are not constructed to explode with time fuses, although they could be
set to go off at any predetermined time. Only the shells we use in the
guns have the timing arrangement.”
“How interesting, but of course I am very ignorant of those terrible
things. I thought they all went off by time.”
“Oh, no. Of course, I am very proud of those bombs because they are
my own invention,” continued Levanter. “The bombs are put in the sea
for protection against any fool government war-vessels that might come
snooping around. A time fuse wouldn’t be of any use for that purpose,
because we don’t know when they might come along. If they do come here
they will hit one of those mines we’ve got laid around the island and
explode it. That would be the end of the snooper.”
“But that’s terrible!” exclaimed Mary, her horror at the thought
momentarily overcoming her effort to dissemble her real feelings.
“That’s downright murder!”
“Oh, don’t worry Mary,” replied Levanter soothingly. “We don’t expect
any of them around here. It’s only a precautionary measure I was
compelled to take to protect us here. Even if they did come and strike
one of the mines we could rescue the crew and make them prisoners. You
see we could then use them as hostages, and they wouldn’t be able to go
back and disclose my secret place.”
“But how would you be able to control such a large number of men?”
persisted Mary.
“Well, if such a thing were to happen we would find some means of doing
it, but we don’t expect such a thing. Anyway, Mary, you know it can
be stopped any time you say the word,” said Levanter looking at her
significantly.
“Oh, please, please don’t. You promised not to talk about that, can’t
you keep your word?” entreated Mary.
“Alright, let’s forget it. I don’t see how this conversation started.
I’m so confounded proud of these bombs that I suppose I went too far in
talking about them. It can’t be very interesting to you.”
“I realize that you must be proud of them,” agreed Mary, “and really
I am very much interested in them, although it’s too deep for me to
understand, but I should like to see how you make them. I have never
been inside your workshop, and it would help me to pass the time away.”
“That’s alright,” said Levanter, “you can come in any time.”
After a further brief conversation he offered to take her over the
shop right away. She readily assented because she was impatient to get
her task completed, especially as the repair work on the airplane was
almost done.
They strolled over to the house where the entire mechanical plant
of Levanter was installed. He showed her the distilling plant with
which he made his alcoholic fuel. Then he led her into the room where
the liquid oxygen was produced that gave him the energy to fly his
airplane. He explained it all to Mary, and she listened carefully,
although somewhat impatiently.
Next he took her into the room where the vacuum containers for the
liquid gas were made. There were two types of containers, one to carry
the fuel for the airplane, and the other for use as bombs. In the
former there was a remarkable siphon arrangement that permitted the
liquid gas to flow freely into the engine, where its expansion was
allowed to take place in such manner that the energy spent by the gas
in expanding from the liquid to the gaseous state was fully utilized in
the propulsion of the airplane.
The second type of container was equipped with a vacuum cap that
included the detonator, thus making the whole thing a very ingenious
bomb when filled with the liquid gas. Levanter explained to Mary that
a little charcoal was included in the container, as it added to the
explosive force of the liquid gas.
After expressing her unqualified admiration at the ingeniousness of
their construction, Mary questioned her captor as closely as she dared
regarding the details of the bombs. She was anxious to learn as much as
possible about them without appearing to be over-curious, or arousing
the suspicion of Levanter. At the time he showed her around his plant
there were none of the shells used in his cannon under construction
but only the bombs which were used to form a protective belt around
the island. Picking one up, Levanter explained it to her in detail.
He showed her where the liquid gas was placed and how it was put it.
Next he showed her the mechanism of the detonator and explained its
operation. It was extremely fortunate for Mary that this was the only
type under construction, as it suited her purpose admirably, if she
could but get possession of one of them.
While Levanter was showing her over the plant she had carefully noted
every detail of each room, the position of the doors, and the way in
which they swung open. She observed the position of the fixtures in
each room and the position of the clear spaces. She had made a complete
mental picture of the place, sufficient, she thought, to enable her
at any time to enter and find her way without difficulty and without
stumbling into anything in case it were necessary to go there at night.
In fact she had noted the place with such extreme care that she had
paid but little attention to Levanter while he was describing many of
the things to her, until she arrived in the bomb construction room.
There she gave her undivided attention to him, because of her desire to
learn just how to handle the dangerous things.
Immediately after Levanter had finished his description, Mary turned to
him with an assumed air of ignorant simplicity and asked:
“I don’t see how you dare carry those dreadful things around if they
are arranged to explode on contact. Aren’t you afraid that you might
press one of those contacts while you are carrying them?”
“There’s no danger of that,” replied Levanter laughing. “You see this
little gadget here on the side,” he asked pointing to a small switch
button, “well, when that is pushed over this way it locks the contact
studs, and they cannot be pressed inward. That button is really a
safety lock. When it’s in this position the studs can’t be pressed in,
and therefore the bomb cannot be exploded. That makes it absolutely
safe to carry around. When we are planting these mines in the sea we
have the safety button on, and take it off just as we lower the mine
into the sea.”
“That’s just what I didn’t understand,” said Mary. “What stops the
mines from being washed ashore?”
“We anchor them with a weight. You see, we haven’t got any real
anchors, because we haven’t got any metal to spare, but we get a great
big heavy rock and tie the mine to it and then drop it overboard.”
“But aren’t you afraid that two of the mines will hit each other? They
must sway about in the water.”
“Well, naturally the movement of the water does that,” replied
Levanter, “and the tides also move them, but we know the length of the
rope we use, and we make allowances for that. You see, we plant them so
far apart that no matter in what direction they move in, they cannot
hit one another. Then we make the whole field wide enough so that a
ship trying to come to the island would be bound to hit one of them.”
“How interesting,” said Mary, carefully concealing the horror she felt
at the diabolical plan unfolded by the man.
“Yes,” answered the pirate, “we are going to plant a few more of these
tomorrow. We are going out in the airplane and will cruise there on the
surface. Would you like to come along with us, and see how we do it?”
“Yes, indeed,” said Mary.
CHAPTER TWENTY-SIX
Over in Honolulu Howard Redmond had gradually become aware of a
feeling, more important but not nearly as thrilling as his adventure
on the sky pirate’s remarkable airplane. It was a feeling destined to
change the entire course of his life. It came during the period of
impatient waiting while trying to overcome red tape and get official
action that would help him to return to Patrocinio Island, and when it
became part and parcel of his consciousness he realized that a mighty
change had taken place in his whole being.
For the past three months he had led a life of such intense action and
adventure, that he had had no time for aught else. The delays he had
experienced in Honolulu had caused him to concentrate his thoughts upon
Mary Ingleton who was languishing in the power of the pirate Levanter
upon an island far removed from civilization, and had intensified his
desire to rescue her at all hazards. While dwelling upon this problem
the conviction suddenly came over him that his desire to rescue her
was not prompted by the mere sense of chivalry in aiding a woman in
distress, but that his feelings toward Mary were entirely above that.
For several days he was in a daze, trying to define these feelings.
He turned all the forces of his mind upon his problem in an effort
to analyze it, but failed; then in the very moment of failure a new
intuitive power he had suddenly gained spread before him the cause of
his new sensation. He was in love! In love with Mary Ingleton!
This sudden realization had a profound effect upon Redmond. He was
in all respects a typical man of the air. Women had always played
a natural but quite incidental part in his existence. They were a
necessary part of his life and surroundings insofar as all human
association is necessary. His whole attention had always been
concentrated upon the details, both technical and practical, of his
chosen profession. He was a stolid individual, naturally shy and
bashful in the presence of the other sex. There was not the slightest
thing in his make-up that would suggest the “ladies man”, in fact he
was the very antithesis to all that is implied by the comprehensive
phrase.
His relationship with Mary Ingleton had been thrust upon him by the
force of circumstances, and his attitude toward her had always been
extremely diffident. He had made his perilous voyage on the Pacific
in the small open boat as a matter of duty. His anxiety to return and
assist her had at first been governed by the same feeling, but the
delay in getting started had rapidly developed the change that her
entry into his life had caused.
Now for the first time in his life he experienced the pangs and
pleasures of the feeling which he defined as love. It tempered his
impatience with tenderness while all the time growing in intensity. It
enthroned within his heart the picture of the girl he was anxious to
succor and cast about her the halo of purity and charm.
While he was still kicking his heels in the office of Captain Smith,
the naval commandant, waiting for the official action which would
send him back as fast as a cruiser could carry him to the woman whose
influence had worked such a wondrous change within him, in strolled
Kenneth Fitzgerald, who was just convalescing from the effects of the
battle with the pirate and the violent emotions which he experienced
during the period of the battle. It was his first day out of the
hospital. He had been informed of the arrival of Redmond in Honolulu
and of the manner in which the officer of the airship Wilbur Wright had
been picked up at sea. He had also been told in substance the story
Redmond had brought back from Levanter’s base.
As Fitzgerald entered the room, still feeble from the effects of his
lengthy illness, Captain Smith looked up and walked over to greet the
air commander. After a brief conversation he turned to Redmond and said:
“Redmond, I want you to meet Wing Commander Fitzgerald. He is the man
who commanded our air forces in the fight with Levanter.”
Then with a smile and knowing wink he added innocently enough:
“And I can whisper to you confidentially that he is madly in love with
the young lady you are anxious to rescue.”
It was then that jealousy laid its bitter grip upon Howard Redmond
for the first time in his eventful life. He grasped the hand that
Fitzgerald extended to him with such force that the latter winced with
pain.
“Good Lord!” he exclaimed weakly though smilingly, “you nearly broke my
hand,” then with an apologetic air he continued: “I’m still pretty sick
you know.”
It was several seconds before Redmond dared trust himself to speak.
During that brief period his mind was consumed with many bitter
thoughts. He knew that Fitzgerald had known Mary for a long time, that
they had been passengers together on the ill-fated Wilbur Wright, and
Mary had often spoken of him on the island. Now he had been told by
Captain Smith that Fitzgerald loved her. Apparently it was an open
secret and therefore Mary must know it too.
Did Mary love Fitzgerald? That was the question with which jealousy now
tortured him. As the thought entered his mind with the full force of
its possibilities he looked into the eyes of his unwitting rival and
then remembered what Fitzgerald had just said:
“Excuse me,” he replied, “I was so busy thinking of getting back to
assist Miss Ingleton that I didn’t realize what I was doing.”
As he spoke a momentary flush of red tinged Redmond’s tanned and
weather-beaten face. The suffusion was caused by his natural ingrained
honesty which rebelled at the untruth he was uttering. It was the first
time in his life he had ever dissembled his real feelings, and the
novelty caused him to blush with shame.
All this was unnoticed by Fitzgerald, who replied easily enough, “Oh,
that’s alright. I know how you feel. My God, I feel worse. I’m dying to
go with you, but the doctors here won’t let me. I’m not only anxious to
help Mary, but I have a great score to settle with Levanter, and by God
I intend to make him pay in full.”
“It’s just as well you can’t go,” said Redmond, “because it would only
add to our difficulties. I know the island thoroughly, and it would be
much better if I went alone. I’ve been trying to convince Mr. Ingleton
of this, but he will not listen to me, so I’ve got to take him along.
It will seriously handicap me.”
Redmond had scarcely finished talking when the door opened and Arthur
Ingleton entered.
“That’s funny,” said Fitzgerald to the newcomer, “we’ve just been
talking about you.”
“I hope it was nothing bad,” replied Ingleton laughingly. Then, before
he could say anything further, Captain Smith, who had been talking over
the telephone, came over and said:
“I’ve got some good news for you, gentlemen. I just got word from
the cable operator that he had received a message from Washington
authorizing me to send the cruiser Farragut to Patrocinio Island and
take both of you there.”
“Have they worked out a plan?” asked Redmond eagerly.
“Yes, the message
outlines the plan of action. Captain Moore has been chosen because he
is familiar with the waters around the island. He is to take you there
and arrange to arrive off the island at sundown, then row you ashore
and land you on the beach Redmond has described. Captain Moore is to
come within sight of the cove at a certain time each night that you and
he will arrange. Then if you have any information to give him, Redmond
can send it by means of a small portable reflected wave wireless set he
will give you. If it is important enough Captain Moore will send it to
us by wireless, using the special naval code. All the details you can
arrange with him.”
“You are not going to put a blockade around the island then, Captain?”
inquired Redmond.
“No,” replied Captain Smith, “it has been decided best not to do this
until everything is in readiness to attack the pirate with every
possibility of success. What do you propose to do after you get on the
island?”
“Well,” said Redmond, “I think it would be best to get Miss Ingleton
away from it the first possible chance we have. I think that I ought
to have a boat left at the cove where we land. There is plenty of
opportunity to hide it there in the vegetation, and the crew of the
cruiser can help us to drag it ashore. If the cruiser is going to
remain within steaming distance all the time, I would suggest that a
light boat be left with us, one that we could readily carry and launch.”
“Oh, certainly,” said Captain Smith, “everything possible will be done
to assist you. Captain Moore will be given instructions to give you
anything you need, and give you every possible assistance that he can.
I would suggest that you confer with him and arrange all your details
together. By the way, if you are successful in getting Miss Ingleton
off the island would you be willing to remain there afterwards and give
us whatever information you could gather about the pirate, until we
have captured him?”
“Why, I would be delighted to do that,” Redmond answered, “first
efforts, however, will be directed toward getting Miss Ingleton away
from the island. You can understand that, of course. After that I will
do everything that I possibly can to get information for you that may
be of use in your operations against him.”
“We appreciate your offer,” said Captain Smith. “We will keep in touch
with you at all times, and if it is necessary for you to remain on the
island after Miss Ingleton has been taken off, you may rest assured
that we will stand by you all the time.”
Immediately after this conference Redmond tried again to dissuade Mary
Ingleton’s father from accompanying him to the island. He brought every
argument that he could think of to bear in the attempt to discourage
the former secretary of the navy from making the trip.
“It would be just as well if you went with us on the cruiser and
remained aboard while I went ashore,” he said to Ingleton. “You would
be fully posted there as to what was taking place, and you could be
ready to come ashore at a moment’s notice if it were necessary for
me to have assistance. But don’t you see how much it will add to the
danger if you come ashore with me right away. It will make it so much
easier for the pirate or his men to discover us. Not only that, but
in case there is a chance of getting your daughter off the island, it
will add to the dangers of our trip in the small light boat, before the
cruiser picks us up.”
“I appreciate all your arguments,” replied Ingleton, “and in a way I am
convinced that you are right. But I can’t bring myself to stand idly by
while knowing that she is in danger. No, it is useless for you to plead
with me. My mind is fully made up, and I am going to the island with
you, or else I go there alone.”
Seeing the futility of further argument, Redmond dropped the entire
matter and began to make his own arrangements for the trip to
Patrocinio Island. He got into communication with Captain Moore and
discussed with him the details of the arrangements between them that
were to be carried out after Redmond had been landed on the island.
It was agreed that Redmond should be at the cove each evening at nine
o’clock and that he would rig up his portable wireless set and call
the cruiser with it until he got a response. This would only be done
in case he had a message of importance to deliver. Each evening at nine
o’clock the cruiser would steam within five miles of the island. At all
other times she would be just below the horizon but within a convenient
radius.
As soon as the details of the trip had been completed the cruiser
Farragut left Honolulu with Redmond and Arthur Ingleton aboard as
passengers. It was decided to proceed to Patrocinio Island at cruising
speed, and it was estimated that the voyage would take about three
days. It was timed so that the cruiser should arrive off the southern
shores of the island after sunset. Captain Moore was then to take his
vessel within a mile of the beach, and a detachment from his crew in a
long boat would row Redmond and Ingleton ashore in a small light boat
and give them assistance in hiding the small boat in the vegetation
ashore, after which the crew would return to the cruiser. As soon as
the two men had landed they were to proceed to the little cave where
Redmond had lived during the period he was on the island and spend the
night there. The following morning they were to go to the meeting place
at the rock where Redmond had always met Mary Ingleton and wait there
for a possible chance of getting her attention again.
At five o’clock on the evening of the third day out from Honolulu
the engines of the cruiser Farragut suddenly slowed down and in a
few minutes stopped altogether. Redmond who was walking along the
quarterdeck with Arthur Ingleton immediately turned to his companion
and said:
“Well, I guess we are almost within sight of our destination. The
engines have just stopped, and I imagine that means Captain Moore is
going to wait for sundown before he proceeds any further.”
Ingleton’s face lit up with a greater animation than he had displayed
in months.
“Let’s go forward and see whether we can make the island out,” he said
eagerly.
Redmond assented to this, and the two made their way forward into the
sharp bows of the cruiser. After they got there both men strained their
eyes at the horizon. A few moments later Redmond, who had picked up a
pair of glasses, said:
“I can just see the island faintly. If you look through these glasses,
sir, you will observe what looks like a small cloud directly to the
north of us. That’s it.”
Ingleton took the proffered glasses and peered through them intently.
While he looked Redmond said:
“I’ll go aft and ask Captain Moore what his plans are. I guess he will
land us immediately after sundown, which will be in another hour’s
time. We’ll probably have dinner before he puts us ashore. I’ll be back
shortly if you want to remain here.”
“Alright,” replied Ingleton, “I think I’ll remain here for a while. I
am anxious to see what the island looks like as we get nearer to it
before dark.”
Redmond turned round and went aft, leaving his companion standing on
the quarter deck. The cruiser still had considerable way on and was
moving through the water at about ten knots an hour. No effort had
been made to check the vessel’s momentum, after the engines had been
stopped. Captain Moore had simply signalled down to stop the engines
and was now allowing the headway to carry his vessel forward.
In less than an hour the blazing sun would disappear below the western
horizon, and then night would descend over the sea with the suddenness
known only in tropical regions. As soon as darkness had cast its
obliterating mantle about them, Captain Moore planned to run his vessel
within a mile of the beach, which was now within sight through the
marine glasses. After that he would land his passengers.
As Redmond reached the companion-way leading to the bridge the roaring
crash of a mighty explosion rent the stillness of the summery sea
and arrested his progress. For one fleeting second a blinding flash
eclipsed the brilliance of the sun and illuminated the forward part
of the ship in its consuming rays. Pausing involuntarily upon the
stairway, Redmond looked toward the bows of the cruiser. As he turned
the vessel shook violently from stem to stern in a sickening, vicious
vibration, which seemed to wrench it plate from plate. It was as though
some volcanic agency had seized it in a destroying grip and was
rending it apart.
Stupefied by the very suddenness of the catastrophe, Redmond could not
remove his eyes from the deck before him. Automatically they recorded
upon his active brain a moving picture of the vivid scene that was
enacted within the brief measured space of two seconds. As he looked
he saw the figure of the former Secretary of the Navy outlined in
sharp contrast by the blinding rays of the flash which accompanied the
explosion. Then, before he could draw a breath, he saw Ingleton’s arms
shoot upwards involuntarily. He saw the figure of the man he had just
left sway unsteadily for a moment and then crash helplessly to the
deck. Then suddenly the spell that had held him in frozen immobility
ended, and he rushed forward blindly, to the man he had just seen fall.
For a few moments chaos reigned upon the war-vessel. Upon the bridge
Captain Moore had been struck in the arm by a piece of flying metal
and painfully injured. Ignoring this, he remained at his post, and
with trained calmness of a naval officer and leader, quietly ordered
the bugler to sound the call “Collision quarters.” Like magic the
discipline of the navy exerted itself and quickly brought order out of
the chaos. Rapidly and steadily each man went to his station, while
officers who were detailed by the commander went forward to ascertain
the cause and effect of the explosion.
Before they had received their orders, however, Redmond had reached
the bows of the ship and was bending over the prostrate form of Arthur
Ingleton. He raised the head of the former naval chief in his arms and
did the best he could to restore consciousness. While he worked, the
ship’s surgeon arrived and quickly examined the injured man. Redmond
watched him a few moments and then said:
“Is he badly hurt, Sir?”
“So far as I can see,” replied the medical officer, “he has not been
seriously injured. He was knocked unconscious by the shock of the
explosion. That in itself is pretty bad and will take a long time for
recovery, but I don’t think he has got any broken bones or internal
injuries. It’s too soon to tell though. I’ll have him removed to the
sick bay right away.”
While this was being done the officers who had been examining the
bows of the cruiser to find out the nature and extent of the damage
completed their task and returned to the bridge where they reported the
result of their examination to the captain.
“It looks as though we had struck a mine, sir, there’s a big hole in
the bows,” the senior officer reported.
“It must be one of that pirate’s mines,” exclaimed the captain. Then he
cried: “Where’s the bo’s’n? Send him here.”
“Here, sir!” replied the bo’s’n, saluting as he came upon the bridge.
“Have you taken any soundings for’ard?” asked Captain Moore.
“Yes, sir!” answered the bo’s’n.
“What do you find?”
“Number one compartment is flooded, sir. Water is pouring into number
two, but we can’t find at what rate yet.”
“Will she stand up?” queried the captain sharply.
“Don’t know yet, sir. The men are taking soundings again now. We are
watching number three. The water’s pouring in very rapidly, and she’s
down by the head.”
“Alright,” added the captain, “report back to me as soon as you find
out at what rate it’s coming in.”
Then turning to the chief executive officer, he ordered:
“Put out the lifeboats and have the crew stand by. Order the fires shut
off down below. Have everything in readiness in case she shows signs
of going down, and wait for further orders, in case we have to abandon
ship.”
CHAPTER TWENTY-SEVEN
The day after Levanter had showed her through his manufacturing plant
dawned fraught with grave possibilities for Mary. It was the day set
for laying the mine bombs in the sea on the western side of the island.
Now or never was her chance! She was to get a first hand demonstration
in the manner of handling the bombs; and after that she must carry out
her dangerous plan immediately, as the repairs to the airplane were now
completed, and there was no telling when Levanter might stroll over to
the beach near the Hilo and discover that the lifeboat was missing.
True he did not go in that direction often, but there was no way of
knowing how soon he might.
As soon as she was dressed Mary went down to the dining room that
had been built in the house where they all lived. Levanter and his
crew were all seated at the table, eating the breakfast that had been
prepared by the Kanaka cook of the schooner. As she sat down the sky
pirate said to her:
“We are going to set out immediately after breakfast, Mary. Will you be
ready then?”
“Yes,” she replied.
She was far too excited to eat much, although she made an ostensible
effort to do so, as she did not wish the men in front of her to suspect
that her feelings were anything but normal. Immediately after the
meal, the men went outside and began to load the bombs which had been
completed on the airplane. Mary went out with them. She noted that they
had carefully observed whether the safety lock was in before picking
up the dangerous things. There were too many to carry on one trip, and
it was decided to make two voyages to the place where they were to be
submerged.
When the task of loading the bombs on the airplane had been completed
Mary went aboard with Levanter and the rest of the crew. The airplane
was released from its mooring to the ringbolt on the jutting rock, and
the marine screw was started. It took about an hour to make the voyage
to the destination because the airplane, although only of shallow
draft, was compelled to cruise well within the mine belt and go slowly.
Its retractible wings were drawn up close to the side of the fuselage
cabin. Only in the harbor itself had sufficient room been left free
from mines for the airplane to land upon and take off from the water.
Once arrived at the scene of the mine laying, Mary watched the
operations with extreme interest. A number of heavy rocks had been
brought along in the airplane, one for each bomb. While the airplane
was cruising to the place where they were to be lowered into the sea,
the crew was engaged in splicing ropes to the rocks. The rocks were
to act as anchors to the bombs. As soon as a rope was spliced on to a
rock, the other end of the rope was attached to the bomb, the length of
the rope being just sufficient to keep the mine submerged.
Immediately after the airplane arrived at its destination its wings
were again extended and were used as a platform from which to drop the
bombs into the sea. Levanter had made a careful survey of the island
and had drawn a chart of it and the waters surrounding it. A pin-point
on this chart marked the exact location of each bomb that had been
previously dropped into the sea.
At the point where he desired to sow the remaining mines the airplane
was brought to a stop, and the crew went out on the wings. One of the
rocks with its rope attached was dropped overboard. At the other end of
the rope the mine was attached, and as soon as the rope became taut the
mine was carefully dropped overboard, after the safety lock had been
released.
Mary watched these operations carefully and intently. Occasionally she
asked Levanter a question, which in every case he did not hesitate to
answer. She had now gained a complete knowledge of the manner in which
the bombs were handled safely, and she was convinced that she herself
could handle them without danger.
While the men were still engaged in their work, Mary was deeply
engrossed in the problem of detonating one of the bombs, should she be
successful in obtaining one and placing it under the schooner Hilo.
It was evident that she could not change the mechanism of the bomb
herself, therefore, she must devise some other means of exploding it
from a point of safety, after placing it beneath the schooner.
She was still deep in this reverie when Levanter and his men had
completed their job. She was brought back to realities by the former
who tapped her on the shoulder and said:
“Mary, I am going to say something personal. I hope you won’t
misunderstand me. I am not saying it to insult you because I know what
I am going to tell you is my fault and not yours.”
“What is it?” asked Mary somewhat sharply.
“It’s a pretty difficult and delicate thing to say,” he replied, “but I
couldn’t help noticing as you stood there how much you are in need of
some new clothes. Your wardrobe must be nearly exhausted.”
“Well, you can’t expect me to keep in the height of fashion on your
island, can you?” said Mary with asperity. “The stores here are not
exactly in the same class with those on Fifth Avenue.”
“I didn’t mean to be rude, Mary,” said Levanter, “the fault is mine, I
know. What I wanted to tell you was that I am going out to get you some
new clothes. The airplane is in good repair again, and as soon as we
get this job done I will go out and get you something new.”
Mary was now all attention. His remark had aroused all the feminine
interest and instincts within her. How did he propose to get new
clothes for her? She had been dissatisfied with her appearance but had
become reconciled to it, especially as there were no other women on the
island. His remark opened up a number of possibilities. Was he going to
take her with him, if so, where? This might offer a chance to escape
from him. Quickly she decided to press him on that point and find out
just exactly what his intentions were.
“You don’t suppose that you can buy clothes that will suit me, do you?”
she asked.
“Well, no,” he replied, “I didn’t intend to buy them. I was going to
get them from my next airship. I thought you could come along and pick
out what you wanted.”
The answer was a distinct disappointment to Mary.
“Do you think I want to wear some other woman’s clothes?” she exclaimed
indignantly.
“Why not, Mary,” inquired Levanter. “There is no other way to get them.
We can’t take you to any store to buy you new ones, and even if we
could, the stores we could take you to are so inferior that you would
undoubtedly get better looking clothes from one of the airships than
you would from any of the stores in the Pacific Islands. Women who can
afford to travel on the airships can afford to have good and stylish
clothes, and you can have the best there is on the airship just for the
taking.”
“Oh; if that’s the case I’m not interested,” said Mary with an air
of finality. “The clothes I have are good enough for me under those
circumstances.”
“But, my dear girl, what you have will soon be in rags; you can’t
expect them to last forever. Besides I like to see you looking nice.”
“Well I can sew them if they become ragged,” she replied, “I am not
going to put anybody in danger for the sake of new clothes.”
* * * * *
“I am going anyway, so you might as well have the best we can get for
you,” said Levanter.
“You may do as you please, but I am not going with you.”
Mary refused to discuss the matter any further, and Levanter did not
insist. She dismissed the subject from her mind. On the way back to the
harbor she became deeply engrossed again in the problem of obtaining
one of the bombs. Having decided upon what she thought was the best way
to do this, she tackled the next problem confronting her. How could she
arrange for its explosion after she had placed it under the schooner
and had herself reached a place of safety?
She had no knowledge of mechanics, and she racked her brain for some
means of accomplishing her purpose without danger to herself. Finally,
after thinking over it for a long time, an idea occurred to her which
she thought might help her.
She could employ a trick she had seen the boys use in snaring birds,
while she was a little girl. If she could get a heavy rock, poise it
above one of the contact studs of the bomb by means of a stick, and
then attach a string to it, she could pull the string and let the rock
fall on the contact. She felt sure that it would fall with sufficient
force to explode the bomb, blow up the schooner, and destroy all
evidence that the lifeboat was missing. It was the best solution of the
difficulty that she could think of. The problem now confronting her was
to obtain one of the bombs.
As the airplane neared the harbor Mary’s mind reverted to the subject
of clothes that had just been broached by Levanter. After all he was
apparently determined to go out again and bring down another airship,
and nothing that she could do or say would prevent him from carrying
out his purpose, short of a direct promise to marry him, and she had
no intention of giving him that. Here indeed was a chance to put her
plan into effect while he was away. She felt sure that on the morning
of his departure he would ask her to accompany him. She decided to
feign illness as a pretext for not going. Then after he had left in the
airplane she would try to get one of the bombs from the workshop and
endeavor to complete her task before he returned. She figured that he
would be away fully six hours and probably longer. This would give her
ample time to do what she wanted, provided the Kanakas kept out of the
way. So far as she could see the latter was the only thing that would
stop her.
When the airplane reached the harbor the crew got busy loading up the
remaining mines that were to be dropped on the western side of the
island. Mary went off the machine with Levanter and shortly after said
to him:
“I don’t feel like going out with you again this afternoon. I think
I’ll remain here while you go out. I want to read.”
“Alright,” he replied.
In the afternoon Mary waited until Levanter and his men went down to
the airplane, then she strolled over to the beach and examined the Hilo
very carefully. She looked for the best place to put the bomb. Then
she searched for a rock heavy enough to fall with sufficient force to
explode the bomb. Having found one, she decided it would be a good idea
to save a lot of time by moving it into position right away.
For the rest of the afternoon Mary worked feverishly and laboriously,
moving the rock over toward the schooner Hilo with the aid of a big
stick she used as a lever. With great patience and persistent effort
she succeeded in getting it alongside the wrecked schooner. Her task
completed, she paused, almost exhausted from the exertion. So violent
had been her struggle in moving the heavy rock that perspiration was
running freely down her face, and her breath was coming in deep heavy
gasps. Still panting, she straightened herself up and looked around. At
that moment she got the greatest shock of her life.
Standing directly behind her, was Levanter with a sardonic smile upon
his face.
CHAPTER TWENTY-EIGHT
Upon the shattered decks of the cruiser Farragut order had scarcely
been established out of the chaos that followed the explosion when
the sun descended below the western horizon. Two minutes later
complete darkness enshrouded the torn bows of the cruiser in a pall of
obscurity, obliterating from view the effects of the violent explosion.
Order reigned, but it was a tradition-enforced order that existed on
the surface of subdued but intense excitement. The men were at their
stations, all standing at attention, awaiting with ill-concealed
anxiety the next command that would move them into welcome action.
Through the mind of every one there passed disturbing thoughts. None
knew which comrade had perished in the catastrophe, and none dared
voice the fears which the darkness intensified.
So close was the damaged cruiser to the shores of Patrocinio Island
that Captain Moore did not dare to show a light. He feared the terrific
report which followed the explosion had betrayed his presence, and
might seriously endanger him should the pirate come out at daybreak.
The darkness that now engulfed them made the task of ascertaining the
extent of the damage almost impossible.
In the short time that intervened between the explosion and the sun’s
descent the cruiser’s bows had presented a picture of torn and twisted
steel, which in some places had been stripped into metal ribbons, and
in others had been torn into crumpled sheets. How far the crippled stem
of the warship had been rent asunder it was impossible to say owing
to the darkness. That it had been seriously damaged was emphasized by
the complete flooding of the forward compartment. The cruiser was also
badly down by the head, which gave a considerable slant to the decks.
That was the condition which confronted Captain Moore when the bo’s’n
came upon the bridge the second time to make his report.
“How’s it look?” asked the captain curtly.
“Number three is holding tight, sir,” replied the bo’s’n. “The pumps
are working on number two. I think she will hold up, sir. We’ve got her
under control now, sir, I think.”
“Good!” exclaimed the captain. “Keep at your soundings and let me know
what they show.”
“Aye, aye, sir,” answered the bo’s’n, as he went about his task.
Then the captain turned to an officer beside him and issued a number of
commands calculated to take care of the desperate situation. He ordered
the crew away from their “abandon ship” stations and set them to work
at various tasks that were necessary under the circumstances.
As soon as it had been ascertained that the ship was not in any
immediate danger of sinking, the surgeon obtained a detail of men and
superintended them while they carefully placed the unconscious form of
Arthur Ingleton on a stretcher and carried him below to the sick bay,
where he was placed on a cot. There the surgeon made a more thorough
examination of the injured man and took the necessary steps to restore
him to consciousness. Redmond, who had helped in removing the stricken
man from the bows of the ship to the sick bay, was waiting for the
surgeon to complete his examination. As soon as it was over he asked
anxiously:
“How is he, doctor?”
“Well, he is in a more serious condition than I thought at first,” was
the reply.
“Then there’s no chance of his recovering in time to go ashore with me,
eh!” inquired Redmond.
“Good God, no,” answered the surgeon, “it will probably be three weeks
or a month before he recovers under the most favorable circumstances.
If he has suffered internal injuries it will take much longer.
Everything depends upon that.”
Redmond said nothing further, but in his heart he was glad that
Ingleton would not be able to go with him, although of course he was
deeply sorry that his injuries had proved to be so serious. As soon
as he had definitely assured himself that there was no chance of the
former secretary’s immediate recovery, Redmond went forward.
Captain Moore was still on the bridge, receiving reports and giving
orders for the tasks that would help in keeping the damaged vessel
afloat. Redmond waited for his opportunity, then went up and asked:
“How does it look, captain, is there any chance of my going ashore
tonight?”
“Yes,” replied the commander, “we’ll take care of you pretty soon now.
We’ve got the situation under control, but I think we’re pretty badly
damaged. As soon as I have found out just where we stand I’ll make
arrangements to put you ashore. How is Mr. Ingleton?”
“He’s in pretty bad shape. The doctor says there isn’t any possibility
of his getting out of bed for a few weeks. Under the circumstances I
think it will be the wisest thing for me to go ashore and look after
Miss Ingleton as soon as you can arrange to get me there. While you are
completing your emergency measures I’ll get my own stuff ready.”
“Alright,” replied the captain.
Redmond went down to his cabin in the after quarters of the cruiser
and packed up the few belongings he had gathered to take ashore with
him. For half an hour afterwards Captain Moore directed the work of
investigation and superintended the emergency measures taken to keep
the cruiser afloat until she could again reach port. This was a most
vital problem because the nearest port at which repairs could be made
was Honolulu, more than fifteen hundred miles away. It meant that any
temporary measures had to be relied upon to hold up the cruiser until
she was able to cover that vast distance at the snail’s pace of about
four knots an hour. It would be impossible for the war-vessel with its
damaged bows to go any faster than that.
As soon as he had satisfied himself that everything possible had been
done under the circumstances, Captain Moore summoned Redmond to the
bridge again.
“Everything’s ready for you now,” said the captain as Redmond came up
to the bridge, “we are going to put you ashore right away. Owing to
this confounded explosion we will not be able to stay here and stand
by you. I am going to advise Captain Smith at Honolulu by wireless and
ask him to send another cruiser here. It will take the other fellow
at least three days to get here, even if he is ready to start off
immediately after Captain Smith gets my wireless. I doubt, however,
whether there is a cruiser available, and even if there is it will
probably be a couple of days before he can get away. That would make it
four days before the other cruiser could get here under most favorable
circumstances.”
“I’ll have to make the best I can of the situation,” said Redmond.
While this conversation was going on, a detail of the crew had launched
one of the steam pinnaces and had attached one of the ship’s gigs to it
as a tow. As soon as this had been done, the officer who had been in
charge of the detail came on to the bridge and, saluting, said to the
Captain:
“All’s ready, sir.”
Captain Moore turned to Redmond and, seizing his hand in a hearty grip,
said:
“Well, good bye, Redmond, and good luck. I’m sorry this mine has put me
out of business, because I wanted to be in at the finish, but I guess
I’m out o’ luck.”
“Good bye, Captain,” replied Redmond. “Somehow I have an idea that you
will be in at the finish all right. You were there at the beginning and
I have a suspicion you will be here again.”
“Well, I hope you’re right,” laughed the captain.
Redmond then followed the officer to the accommodation ladder on the
side of the cruiser. The two men got into the steam launch, and the
officer gave the word to “shove off.”
On the short run to the beach the officer said to Redmond:
“When we get to the cove my men will give you a hand in putting the
boat ashore. I guess you don’t want it any further inshore than is
necessary. How do you propose to launch it from the beach in case of
necessity.”
“Well, if you can spare the time,” said Redmond, “you can come ashore
with me and look the place over for the most suitable spot to hide the
boat. I never thought of any launching arrangement before. Have you by
any chance got any wooden rollers in the launch that I could use under
the keel of the boat?”
“Yes, I thought of that,” replied the officer, “and I put a few of them
aboard the launch. You can have them, that’s what I brought them for,
but even so it will be a pretty stiff job for you to push the boat into
the sea anyway, especially if anybody is after you.”
“If anybody were after me,” said Redmond, “I wouldn’t attempt to launch
it. I would take a chance of remaining on the island and fighting the
pirate from the bushes. I’m armed now and have got a better chance
against him. Under any circumstances Miss Ingleton will be able to give
me a hand. She is a pretty strong young woman.”
The trip in the launch to the little bay was made very slowly because
of the intense darkness. With extreme care the officer in charge felt
his way, then maneuvred his craft under the direction of Redmond until
it pulled up alongside a ledge of rock that jutted out into the sea.
This made an ideal platform upon which to land, as its surface was just
above the gun’les of the launch. Redmond and the officer jumped out,
and the latter instructed three of his men to row the small gig to the
beach, pull it ashore and wait for them there.
While the men were doing this, Redmond and his companion walked near
the beach where the boat could be hidden in the brush. The beach was
of a gravel nature which extended inshore for two or three hundred
yards in an irregular line. Back of this the tropical vegetation was
extremely thick and was interspersed with banana plants and cocoanut
palms.
After a considerable search the two men succeeded in locating what they
thought was an excellent place to hide the boat. Then they went down
to the beach where the men had dragged the boat ashore and gave a hand
in pulling it over the ground to the place where they had selected its
hiding place. There they carefully placed it in the bushes, after which
they removed with care all traces of the boat’s passage over the beach.
“Well, I guess we’ll go back now,” said the officer, “is there anything
else we can do to help you?”
“No,” replied Redmond.
“Alright, we’ll get along then. I wish you the best of luck, old man,
and I can tell you we are all sorry that we won’t be able to stand
by you. We were all set to have a go at that dirty son-of-a-gun the
pirate, but we’re out o’ luck, that’s all. Good bye--good luck!”
CHAPTER TWENTY-NINE
For several moment after the naval crew had left him on the shores of
the little cove at the southern end of Patrocinio Island Redmond paused
deep in thought. He was confronted with a very confusing dilemma.
Should he remain where he was for the rest of the evening and take a
nap in the bushes surrounding the cove, or should he try to make his
way in the darkness to the cave where he had lived during his previous
stay on the island?
If he went forward in the dark, he mused, there was always the
possibility that he might stumble over something and betray his
presence. On the other hand, with nothing but vegetation to hide in
where he was, he might easily be discovered in the morning, should any
of the pirate gang happen to come over to that side of the island.
After weighing the matter carefully in his mind, he decided to stay
where he was. He figured this would entail the least risk, and
moreover, he was anxious to inspect the place where the boat was
hidden, during daylight, so that he would be more familiar with it, in
case of need.
Having reached this decision, he searched around for a suitable spot to
sleep in, and having found it, threw himself down and slept soundly for
the rest of the night.
As daylight burst in on the tropical sky the following morning, Redmond
awoke, bright and alert. He ran over to where a small brook was
trickling its way into the bay and took a hurried wash. Then, after a
meal of bananas plucked from the plants around him, he made a brief
examination of the hiding place where the row boat was stowed away. No
better place could have been chosen even in daylight. It lay alongside
a small bumpy piece of ground not more than a hundred yards from the
sea, and it was completely hidden from view by vegetation. There was
not a single mark on the beach to show where it had been pulled from
the water over to its hiding place. In the boat was the small compact
wireless set which would be a link between himself and the cruiser in
case of emergency. It was of the reflected wave type, operating on a
wavelength of half a meter. It could be conveniently held in the hand,
and yet it could easily carry his voice for a distance of twenty-five
miles in a straight line. This remarkable efficiency was due to the
fact that instead of radiating in every direction, the electro-magnetic
waves were reflected in the same manner that a beam of light is
reflected from a mirror. The set was so designed that it could be used
for transmission and reception, thus making it possible to conduct a
conversation with it. The power required was supplied by a single dry
cell, and a small high voltage battery. It was a development of the
system first produced by Guglielmo Marconi, the inventor of wireless,
and his assistants in 1922. Satisfied that the boat would escape
detection and yet be easily moved into the sea in case of need, he
started his journey into the interior of the island, where his old cave
was located. His progress was necessarily slow because of the density
of the tropical vegetation which covered the island in an almost solid
patch. After trudging for a little more than an hour, he finally
reached the cave that had been his home for so many nights. Everything
was practically as he had left it.
Redmond had brought with him a few necessities, which he figured would
make his stay at the cave more endurable, and these he proceeded to
stow away carefully where they could not be seen in case any of the
outlaws should happen to pass that way. Among the things he brought
with him was an automatic pistol, a very small revolver, and a short
range rifle equipped with a silencer. After he had hidden his small
camp equipment, he threw himself down within the shade of the cave for
a brief nap during the heat of the midday sun.
The afternoon was well advanced when he awoke again. Hurriedly he
gathered a meal from the growths around him and washed it down with
copious draughts from the brook that passed around the hill in which
the cave was located. This done, he set out on his journey to the rock
where he had been in the habit of meeting Mary Ingleton during his
previous stay on the island. With him he took the rifle for use in
any emergency that might arise. In his pocket he had placed the small
revolver. This he intended to give to Mary at the first opportunity as
a means of protection for herself.
He moved forward cautiously. It was now a long time since he had last
trodden the path and he was not absolutely sure of himself, and the
trail he had broken was covered completely over with thick growth.
Another reason that impelled him to caution was the fact that he did
not know what changes might have taken place at the pirate’s end of
the island. As he went forward he realized that he was confronted
with the most hazardous part of his trip, and as he walked with
difficulty through the jungle two concurrent but unconnected thoughts
passed through his alert mind. Almost subconsciously one thought was
concentrated upon the task before him of getting to the rock safely
without detection. It was engendered by his fixity of purpose and
developed by the quick observation of his eyes and the keen perception
of his ears.
Coincident with this thought was another and more intimate one which
proceeded from his reasoning faculties. It was caused by his anxiety
over the safety of the young woman he had come to assist, but its
continuation was due to an entirely different reason.
It was several weeks since he had last seen Mary Ingleton, and many
things had happened to him during that period. Now that he was
approaching the critical part of his adventure he wondered how she had
fared while he had been in Honolulu and she was on the island at the
mercy of the pirate and his crew with no one to encourage or protect
her.
As he thought his mind reverted back to the time when he had set out
from the island in the frail boat to reach civilization and bring aid
to Mary. At that time, he mused, he was actuated by purely altruistic
and chivalrous motives. The series of remarkable adventures he had
undergone and the suffering he had experienced, however, had caused him
many moments of serious introspection during that time, and now he knew
that an entirely different cause motivated his present efforts.
There was no doubt about it. His former indifference toward the weaker
sex had entirely disappeared, and in its place a new feeling had been
engendered within him. With the calculating calmness that was one of
his chief characteristics he had analyzed carefully day by day the new
sensation, and after a long deliberation he had come to a conclusion as
unexpected as his cogitation had been lengthy. He realized and admitted
to himself that he was in love with the young woman he was now on his
way to aid.
Strangely enough the realization brought him no feeling of happiness.
Instead his mind was sorely troubled. It was beclouded with depressing
thoughts concerning Mary and gloomy conjectures regarding her safety.
Under any other circumstances he would have pushed forward to assist
her with only the thought of getting to the scene of her involuntary
imprisonment at the earliest possible moment. Now, however, a series
of wild conjectures as to what might have happened to her during his
absence coursed through his mind in rapid succession to torture him.
He imagined all kinds of gruesome things, and even though he carefully
argued that all of them were impossible, nevertheless he could not
entirely cast the gloomy ideas from his mind.
Thus, alternately rising to the heights of hope and then falling into
the depths of despair, he trudged slowly forward through the jungle
until he reached its edge. Then he looked out over the clearing where
the pirate had established his base. In the foreground was the rock
where he had met Mary so many times before. Not a sign could he see of
any of the outlaw gang upon the shores, or near the buildings where
they lived and worked, nor was Mary to be seen anywhere.
He was disappointed. Having assured himself that no one was in sight,
he cautiously emerged from the shelter of the vegetation about him,
and then made his way slowly and carefully to the rock. It was his
intention to stay there as long as it was daylight, on the chance of
attracting Mary’s attention, should she come out of the building. If
unsuccessful in this he had decided to come back each day until he had
finally seen and spoken to her. He was anxious to complete the plans
for her escape as soon as possible, despite the fact that it would be a
few days before another cruiser could possibly arrive from Honolulu and
take the place of the damaged Farragut.
He reached the rock in safety and then lay down beside it. He made
himself as comfortable as he could under the circumstances. In this
condition he was hidden in such a manner that he could look around the
base of the rock and get a clear view of the pirate’s base before him
without being visible himself.
As he looked over the harbor he saw the remarkable airplane of the
pirate afloat near the rock to which it was moored. He concluded that
Levanter and his crew must be upon the island. His reasoning was
apparently confirmed by the small wisp of bluish smoke which was idly
rising out of the small stack in the workshop building where the liquid
oxygen fuel was made by Levanter’s men.
It seemed as though he had been lying there for years before anything
happened. In reality a little more than an hour had elapsed from the
time he took his position behind the rock until he saw two figures
emerge from the larger building. As they moved about he recognized in
them Levanter and Mary. Instinctively he gripped his rifle. He brought
it to his shoulder as he lay, ready at a moment’s notice to aim and
fire. His natural caution however warned him against any hasty action
that might jeopardize the chances of rescuing Mary, especially as it
would be several days before he could get her off the island under any
conditions.
Silently and intently he watched the two figures. They appeared to be
engaged in a very excited conversation, judging from their animated
gesticulations. As they spoke to one another they were gradually
walking to the landing place where the airplane lay at its moorings.
Occasionally Mary would stop, and Levanter would turn toward her and
apparently argue with a great show of eagerness before they began to
move on again.
Suddenly Redmond set himself in tense but subdued alertness. His quick
eye had detected a decided change in the situation when Mary had
stopped once more. He distinctly saw her stamp her foot, apparently
in anger, turn completely around and then start back in the direction
whence she and Levanter had come. As she did so he saw the latter leap
forward and grasp Mary by the shoulder. He saw the pirate stop Mary
abruptly by the strength of his grip and shake her visibly. The scene
he witnessed completely severed the restraining grip of caution that
had held him motionless. He was inwardly boiling with an all consuming
rage engendered by the scene that was being enacted before him upon
the beach, and under the sour of its intensity he raised his rifle to
his shoulder and fired. The bullet sped silently and true. Redmond saw
Levanter’s grip loosen from Mary’s shoulder. He saw the pirate reel
unsteadily for a second, then fall in a huddled heap upon the ground.
CHAPTER THIRTY
For three days after her crew had placed Redmond on the shores of
Patrocinio Island, the damaged cruiser “Farragut” limped steadily
forward at the rate of twelve knots an hour toward Honolulu. Hers was
probably one of the most forlorn voyages ever undertaken. When she left
Honolulu every man on board was keyed up to the pitch of expectation,
proud and eager to be in at the finish of the pirate whose depredations
had aroused the entire world. Now their ship was slinking back to port
in a crippled condition, rendered impotent by one of the defensive
weapons of the pirate they had hoped to capture.
Immediately after Redmond had been placed ashore the crew of the
“Farragut” stretched a tarpaulin around the shattered bows of their
vessel to break the force of the water. Other temporary repairs were
also made. Fortunately, the bulkhead between the second and third hold,
which had not been damaged by the explosion, was still watertight and
sufficiently strong to enable the ship to proceed at the reduced speed.
Realizing the desperate nature of the voyage before him, Captain Moore
took the shortest possible course to his destination, and although
it practically paralleled the regular trade route between Honolulu
and Midway Island, not a single object was sighted to relieve the
monotonous sameness of the vast sea throughout the dreary time that
had elapsed since the return trip began. Several times the war-vessel
had been very close to the various uninhabited rocks belonging to the
Hawaiian archipelago, but none had been sighted. In fact, no effort had
been made to approach them.
Early on the fourth day of the voyage, when sun observations showed
the “Farragut” was approaching the elongated island of Niihau, Captain
Moore sent instructions forward to the men on duty to keep a sharp
watch for sight of land. This order had scarcely been issued when the
look-out man in the fighting top of the foremast sang out to the bridge:
“There’s a ship about two points on the port bow, sir.”
Captain Moore was in the navigating room at the time. He immediately
gave orders to the quartermaster, who promptly threw his helm over, so
that the “Farragut” would approach the other ship. Within half an hour
the two vessels were close enough to permit semaphore signalling to one
another. Before that time, however, it was clearly evident that the
stranger was a war-vessel of the fast light cruiser type.
Having ascertained the nature of the stranger, Captain Moore naturally
surmised that she was on her way to take his place off Patrocinio
Island, in response to the emergency message he had sent shortly after
the explosion had damaged the bows of his ship.
In her subsequent signals the approaching cruiser said she was the “New
Orleans”, under instructions to proceed to Patrocinio, and intercept
the “Farragut” on the way. Her commander then added that he had orders
for Captain Moore and asked the latter to come to in order that he
could deliver them.
This was done immediately, and shortly afterwards a small launch was
lowered from the “New Orleans”, which then started over toward the
“Farragut.” When the launch came alongside the damaged cruiser Captain
Simmons of the “New Orleans” came aboard and went into the navigating
cabin. There, after customary greetings had been exchanged with Captain
Moore, Simmons said:
“I have instructions for you from headquarters at Honolulu. Here they
are.”
He then handed Captain Moore a sealed envelope and continued:
“As I understand it, we are to change commands and you are to take
the “New Orleans” on to Patrocinio and carry out your original
instructions.”
Captain Moore took the message and hurriedly read it. It confirmed,
in regulation navy form, what Captain Simmons had just said. The two
officers then went through the necessary formalities of transferring
their commands. As soon as this had been completed they engaged in
conversation for a few moments, during which Moore gave his colleague
an outline of the explosion and the events that followed it.
“How is Mr. Ingleton now?” asked Captain Simmons.
“He’s improving wonderfully,” replied Captain Moore. “At first the
doctor was afraid he had suffered internal injuries, but I understand
that such is not the case. He is still laid up, suffering from the
effects of the shock, but he is expected to recover pretty rapidly now,
I believe.”
“Well, I’m glad to hear that. Was he disappointed at not being able to
go ashore with Redmond to aid his daughter?”
“We haven’t discussed that situation with him at all. The doctor has
asked us not to do so, and I think it would be a wise idea not to
mention it to him. In fact, if I were you, I would not visit him at
all because if he saw there had been a change of commanders he might
suspect something and begin worrying. So far as I am aware, he is still
under the impression that we are lying off Patrocinio. He can’t feel
the ship’s vibration where he is lying. It will be best to let him
recover first and then explain the turn of events to him afterwards.”
For the next few moments the conversation dwelt upon naval matters
generally, in the course of which Captain Moore asked:
“What’s the latest in connection with operations against the pirate?
Have any new plans been decided upon?”
“No! So far as I know, there is no change in the situation, except
that I heard the experts in Washington have cabled that they have been
successful in developing a new kind of bomb and shell that is to be
used against him when everything is ready for the final operations.”
“What’s the nature of it?” inquired Moore.
“I don’t know exactly. I understand that it is a chemical bomb
containing some liquid gas, probably something like those Levanter is
reported to be using.”
“We haven’t heard a thing during the time we have been coming from
the island,” said Captain Moore, “so we have been wondering whether
anything unusual had happened, or whether the pirate had been out from
his base at all.”
“There is nothing new,” replied Captain Simmons. “The pirate has been
inactive ever since you left Honolulu. I imagine that he is undergoing
periodical repairs. He is undoubtedly having great difficulty in
obtaining the supplies he needs for his engines. The private companies
are not taking any chances, and most schedules have been completely
abandoned until there is a greater measure of security against him. Of
course, I don’t know anything about the plans that are being made, but
I have an idea that it won’t be very long now before a concentrated
attack is made against the pirate. I know all kinds of pressure is
being brought to bear on the government to move against him, and
everybody is keyed up. You are a lucky dog. You’ll probably be right on
the job when things are moving.”
“Well, I hope they move quickly,” said Moore, “it’s no cinch lying
around off that God-forsaken place waiting for something to happen and
not knowing anything. It can’t come too quick to suit me.”
“Well, I wish you luck anyway,” said Simmons as Moore rose to leave. A
few minutes afterwards the latter was in the launch on his way to take
over his new command and proceed back to the pirate’s nest.
CHAPTER THIRTY-ONE
When Levanter fell with a bullet from Redmond’s silent rifle through
his leg, Mary Ingleton gained a respite from the most trying ordeal
of her life. As it happened, Redmond’s return to Patrocinio Island
occurred the evening before the pirate had taken Mary on the mine
laying trip, and the former officer of the Wilbur Wright was actually
making his way across the island from his cave to the old meeting place
when Levanter surprised Mary beside the schooner Hilo. A lifetime
of emotion had been concentrated for her in the brief hour which
intervened between the two incidents.
At the moment when, flushed and worn out from the tremendous effort
she had made in rolling the rock alongside the wrecked schooner, Mary
looked up and saw her captor before her the surprise sent her heart
into violent palpitation. For several seconds--a seeming eternity--she
stood in open mouthed astonishment, speechless and helpless. The pirate
watched her unfeigned amazement while he endeavored to guess the reason
for her exertions. Finally he broke the tensity of the situation by
exclaiming:
“What are you trying to do, Mary?”
His question brought Mary out of her stupor, back to her normal self.
“Good Heavens,” she gasped, “you startled me terribly. How did you get
here?”
“I’m sorry,” replied Levanter, with a cynical smile. “I didn’t mean to
frighten you, dearest. I changed my mind at the last moment and didn’t
go out with the men. I sent Johnson out to superintend the mine laying
job and then I came back. I saw you come out here and I just naturally
followed you.”
The term of endearment used for the first time by Levanter since her
imprisonment on the island brought a flush to Mary’s cheeks. It was not
caused by any feeling of embarrassment. In fact the mingled feelings
which had gripped her following his sudden appearance were completely
consumed now in the molten heat of her violent hatred for the man
before her. The flush was one of anger. The sky pirate on the other
hand misinterpreted it entirely. The appearance of the blush on Mary’s
face as he addressed her endearingly, caused him to forget momentarily
the suspicions her actions had engendered within his mind.
Mary’s anger had now overcome her fear and to a certain extent
subjected her judgement. Turning to Levanter, she exclaimed with
considerable emphasis:
“I think you are terribly mean to scare me like that. I didn’t think
you were prowling after me and spying on me.”
The remark brought Levanter out of the realm of speculation back to
realities and his suspicions.
“But I can’t understand what on earth you were doing pushing that big,
heavy rock about,” he said.
“Oh, I was just exercising,” said Mary sarcastically, still angry.
Levanter left her and went over to the wrecked schooner. He began to
examine it carefully, particularly where Mary had rolled the rock up
alongside it. Despite his careful search, he could find nothing wrong,
and the failure left him still further perplexed as to her motives.
What was her object in struggling so persistently with the rock, he
reflected? It certainly was not for the purpose of exercise, because
there were many more pleasant ways in which she could have done that.
No! There was some real reason for it, and he made up his mind to find
out what it was.
After making a complete search around the schooner, he clambered aboard
the wreck and carried his investigation further. He went through the
battered hull, from stem to stern, picking his way slowly and carefully
through the piled up debris. Everything about the old schooner was as
natural and normal as could be under the circumstances, considering the
length of time it had lain upon the beach, subject to the constant
pounding of the heavy surf. Disappointed, Levanter came up on the deck
again and continued his survey there.
Suddenly he stopped short, his eyes fell upon the empty boat davits in
the stern. He walked over and examined them carefully. The blocks and
tackle were close hauled to the top of the davits, and the slack of the
rope was coiled about the deck. The lifeboat was gone!
Levanter thought deeply and intensely. In what condition was the
lifeboat when he and his men wrecked the schooner on the beach? To
the best of his recollection, the boat had been left on the davits.
In fact, he was almost sure of it, because he remembered ordering his
men to break in its sides. He looked over the side to make sure that
the boat was not lying waterlogged in the surf. There was no trace of
it. Having made sure of this, he scrambled back ashore and went over
to Mary. Throughout the time he had been on the schooner she had stood
waiting, deep in thought, puzzling her brain for some plausible excuse
to explain her actions. She realized she had been caught red-handed,
and she knew that whatever the outcome of the present situation,
Levanter would be suspicious and watch her every action. It certainly
meant the end of her plan to cripple his adventure by means of one of
his own bombs. Also, it was quite possible that he would considerably
restrict her liberty or movement about the island.
“Where is the lifeboat?” he queried, somewhat irritably.
“How should I know?” replied Mary.
“Well it’s missing,” continued Levanter, “and you must know something
about it, otherwise I can’t understand what you are doing here.”
“I don’t know anything about it,” Mary retorted with heat, unashamed at
the lie. Didn’t you break it up? That’s what you told me before.”
“So I did, but I left it hanging on the davits, and it isn’t there now,
and what’s more, I find you doing a most unacountable thing around
here. That’s what I can’t understand. There must be some connection in
this thing, and you might as well tell me what it is. If you think you
can get away from me, you are very foolish.”
“I am not so silly,” said Mary, “I know I can’t get away and I’m not
going to take any foolish chances. There’s nothing I can tell you about
your old boat.”
For several minutes Levanter plied her with questions in a vain effort
to trap her into some admission that would give him a clue to the
mystery that confronted him. She answered readily enough at first, but
in a completely non-commital manner, and when he began to press her
more closely she became more reticent, and finally refused to answer
at all. This attitude set fire to the kindling ferocity in Levanter’s
temper and he stepped toward her.
Realizing the change and really alarmed, Mary began to walk away toward
the huts. She had no idea what to do, except that she thought it wise
to get as far away from him as she could while he was in his present
threatening mood. He strode after her angrily.
“Why don’t you answer me?” he demanded as he reached to grasp her.
She evaded him readily enough, but for the first time in her life she
was really afraid. In fact she was almost terror-stricken. More than
ever the realization dawned upon her that she was completely within the
man’s power and at the present moment alone with him.
“Don’t you dare to touch me!” she exclaimed.
The pirate laughed at her. “Why, what would you do?” he asked.
Then, as she did not answer, he continued, “My dear girl, there is
nothing that you can do. You will have to do as I tell you. You can’t
get away from me. I am determined to find out just what you were doing
up at the schooner, and you might as well tell me now as later.”
While he was talking Mary was walking slowly forward, watching him
closely out of the corner of her eye. There had flashed through her
mind the memory of their last encounter when he had flared up and
tried to seize her--the time when Walter Johnston, the pirate’s chief
assistant, interrupted in her behalf. As far as she knew all the
members of the pirate crew were still out on the airplane, laying
mines along the coast, and consequently she was alone on the island
with Levanter, with the exception of course of the Kanakas. It was no
use looking to them for any assistance.
Helpless as she apparently was, however, Mary still hoped that by some
fortunate chance the crew had already returned from the mine laying
trip, so she steadily walked along, hoping against hope that she would
attract the attention of Johnston.
The momentary laugh which had escaped from Levanter tempered the
intensity of his wrath somewhat, but he was still in a highly inflamed
temper. He continued after Mary, trying hard to solve the mystery
surrounding the incident which had given rise to the present situation.
They continued in this manner for several minutes, to Mary’s great
relief, until finally they came up to the huts.
The Kanakas were all busily engaged at the tasks which had become
routine to them. Mary felt a little easier because, while it was
extremely doubtful just what they would do in case the pirate molested
her, she felt that she was not as isolated as she had been at the
opposite side of the harbor where the wreck of the Hilo was lying.
She gave a quick glance toward the airplane-mooring place, but her
hopes were quickly dashed, for there was no sign of the machine. She
realized now that it was a case of her wits against the temper of the
pirate. There was no use going any further, she figured, as that would
take her away from the Kanakas, and she realized bitterly that Levanter
would follow her wherever she went. She tried hard to think of some way
of getting out of the mess, but nothing occurred to her.
Suddenly she turned around and faced Levanter.
“Why do you keep following me?” she cried. “What do you want of me?”
The violent anger which had possessed Levanter had cooled down
considerably. During the walk from the schooner he had been thinking
hard, going back over every possible detail and every incident that he
could think of that had taken place during Mary’s stay on the island.
As a result of this recollection, three things stood out prominently in
his memory.
First, the unexpected, unexplained and untraced disappearance of his
man, Harrison, which had long since passed out of his mind.
Second, the decided change which had recently come over Mary in regard
to her attitude toward him and her sudden interest in all of his plans
and activities; and
Third, the unusual task she was engaged in when he surprised her a
short time ago.
Surely, he reflected, there must be some connection between these
things. But what that connection was he could not figure out.
A new thought suddenly came into his mind: Had Harrison turned traitor
on him?
The very idea caused his anger to flare up again. Had Harrison got away
in the Hilo’s lifeboat? No? he thought to himself, that would have been
impossible. He could not have repaired it and made it seaworthy in
such a short time, and besides his disappearance had been discovered
immediately. Moreover, the search he and his men had made with the
airplane the following day would have quickly disclosed the presence of
any boat on the sea, and he remembered that the search had been very
thorough indeed. Not only this, but the search on the island itself had
been very complete. Finally he dismissed the thought by deciding that
Harrison had been drowned after all.
Having convinced himself on this point, he tried to reason out some
plausible explanation of the other incidents which were puzzling
him. His thoughts kept him so fully engrossed that he was completely
oblivious of his surroundings. The sudden exclamation of Mary brought
him back to actualities. He looked at her for a few moments before
replying, his temper mounting rapidly again.
“By God!” he said finally, “I’m going to find out what you were doing
and what it was all about.”
“Do you mean you are going to hurt me?” demanded Mary, with a show of
defiance.
“Suppose I decide to,” he said with a sneer, “who do you think would
stop me?”
“If you try to molest me, I shall call the Kanakas.”
“A lot of good they would do you!” he jeered. “You needn’t get alarmed,
though. I’m not going to hurt you. At any rate, not now.”
Then, as though to belie his words, he started over toward her, saying
as he went:
“What do you know about that man of mine, Harrison, who disappeared?”
As he spoke Levanter raised his hand and brought it down on Mary’s
shoulder. He had scarcely touched her when he uttered a cry of pain,
and then suddenly fell in a heap upon the ground.
Mary was completely staggered at the sudden turn of affairs. For
several moments she stood in stupified silence, looking at the pirate
who was writhing in agony where he lay. Finally collecting her wits,
she said:
“What’s the matter?”
“Good Lord!” he gasped, “I’ve been shot.”
“Shot!” exclaimed Mary incredulously. “Who could have shot you? I
didn’t hear anything.”
“I don’t know,” he replied weakly.
“Where are you hurt?” she asked.
“In my right leg. I think the bone is shattered.”
Suddenly a great light dawned on Mary. Surely it must have been Redmond
who had fired the shot. It was a long time since she had received the
welcome code letters over the wireless from the big government naval
radio station at Honolulu which told of his safe arrival there, and
she had been waiting anxiously day by day for his return. Many times
had she strolled expectantly to their old meeting place in the hope of
seeing him, only to be disappointed. Surely this must be Redmond now.
Who else could have fired the shot?
Almost instinctively she turned and looked over to the rock. Suddenly
her heart leaped with joy; there at the side of the boulder she could
clearly make out his head peering out from behind it. Unthinkingly she
motioned him to get back. Then realizing that her gesture might have
been observed by the pirate, she turned in alarm at her foolish action.
CHAPTER THIRTY-TWO
Fortunately for Mary Ingleton the pirate was in such intense pain he
had not observed the motion she had made when signalling Redmond to
get back behind the rock. She realized that if he became aware of
the latter’s presence on the island their chance of escape would be
very slim indeed, but she felt sure that Levanter was in far too much
pain at the present moment to ask questions about the bullet that had
wounded him. Having assured herself that for the moment everything was
safe, she bent toward the wounded man and said:
“I’m going over to get the Kanakas to come over and carry you into the
hut.”
He murmured his assent between groans.
Seizing the opportunity thus presented, Mary walked as far as the first
house between herself and Levanter, where she was in sight of the rock
behind which Redmond was hiding. She waved her arm until she saw his
head cautiously emerge from the rock. Then she gave him the signal to
remain there until she could come over.
Having assured that Redmond had understood her, Mary went over to
the shop where the Kanakas were at work. Having found the chief, she
explained to him what had happened, and in a few moments the whole gang
walked over with her to the place where Levanter was lying.
It took but a few moments to improvise a stretcher under Mary’s
direction, and the wounded man was carefully placed upon it by the
tribesmen. This completed, the Kanakas bandaged up the injured leg to
prevent further bleeding and carried Levanter over to the living hut
where they placed him on a bed.
As they entered the room Mary, who was following in the rear, happened
to cast a quick glance toward the rough table on which the pirate
generally did his planning. A familiar looking paper was lying on it.
A closer but quick glance showed here it was the chart of the island,
marked with the position of every mine which the pirate had sown around
the island. Making use of her opportunity, Mary hurriedly snatched it
and thrust it in the neck of her dress.
Immediately after Levanter had been laid upon the bed Mary went over
and asked him how he felt. He answered in a gruff manner. Then she said:
“I don’t know whether I should but if there is anything I can do for
you I will.”
“I don’t want anything,” he replied ungraciously.
“Well, then,” she added, “I am going out to see if I can see the
airplane and if so get them to come to you immediately.”
Without waiting any further she walked out of the hut. Once outside,
she looked quickly over the harbor and, convincing herself that there
was no sign of the pirate aircraft, hurried over to the rock were
Redmond was hiding.
She went straight behind the rock where she was completely out of sight
of the settlement along the beach. As she was behind its sheltering
form she turned toward the former airship officer and with all the
fervor in her voice she exclaimed:
“Oh! I’m so glad you are back, Mr. Redmond! I thought you would never
come.”
As she said this Mary uttered a deep sigh. In it were concentrated all
the mingled emotions that had been pent up within her. It brought to
her a sense of security and contentment such as she had not felt since
she came to the island and it removed the terrific strain on her nerves
which had almost resulted in a swoon.
For Redmond this was one of the epochal moments of his life. Through
his mind there rushed tumultuously a hundred thoughts in a pell-mell
fashion, but overshadowing all, there was the impelling desire to grasp
the girl before him in his arms and tell her how deeply he loved her.
For a few seconds there was a desperate struggle within him between
desire and wisdom, and throughout that time he remained tongue-tied.
It had been a most trying hour for him indeed. Ever since he had fired
the shot which wounded the pirate his mind had been preyed upon by
the thought that perhaps his hasty action had ruined all chances of
rescuing the girl whose existence he was convinced meant his future
happiness.
He shuffled uneasily and finally blurted out:
“I couldn’t get here before, Miss Mary.”
The spell at last broken, Redmond plunged into his narrative and told
his companion all that happened since the time he pushed off alone in
the dead of the night on his fateful trip in the frail lifeboat.
“We are in a pretty bad mess,” he concluded, “because I don’t know how
long it will be before the relief ship is able to get here, and it will
be impossible to get you off the island until it does get here. That’s
the reason why I am afraid that I made a mistake in shooting Levanter.
From here it looked as though he was going to strike you, and I just
lost my head and shot him.”
“Don’t worry about it,” said Mary with a soothing tone in her voice,
“perhaps it will all turn out for the best, after all. At least, let’s
hope so.”
She then told him what had happened and the reason for the scene which
had led up to the shooting. At that point she added:
“Oh! while I was in his room just now, I saw the chart he had with all
the places where he has put those dreadful mines. I picked it up. Do
you think it will be of any use to you?”
“Will it?” said Redmond with glee. “Why, that’s the best thing we could
possibly get hold of. I’ll give it to the captain of the ship that is
coming in place of the Farragut.”
Thus they talked for quite a while until Mary suddenly came back to
realities.
“The airplane will be back any time now,” she said. “What do you think
I had best do?”
Redmond thought a while before replying. It was indeed a serious
situation, and difficult to decide just what to do. There was no doubt
that both of them would have to be extremely careful, as the pirate’s
wound would have to be explained somehow. The crew would undoubtedly
suspect the presence of a stranger on the island. Having turned the
problem over in his mind thoroughly, Redmond finally said:
“At first I was going to suggest that you come along with me and take
a chance of escaping at the first opportunity, but as we don’t know
just when the next cruiser will get here, it would mean that we would
both have to hide on the island until it arrived, and that would be
suicidal. I hate to send you back there, Miss Mary, but I think it
would be best under the circumstances, and it might allay to their
suspicions. Besides, it will make the whole affair more of a mystery to
them. You will have to deny all knowledge of how the shooting occurred.”
“If you were to disappear at this time,” Redmond continued, “they would
begin to search the island. Maybe they will anyway. I’m going to be
as careful as I can. Much more so than I was before. I’m going to the
southern end of the island tonight and send out a call on the portable
wireless set I have there, in the hope of picking up whatever cruiser
is coming along to take the place of the Farragut. I’ll try to get back
to the rock here tomorrow if the conditions are right.”
Then after a short pause he added:
“I know it’s going to be very trying and very hard for you, Miss Mary,
but I think it’s the best thing to do under the circumstances. I’ll try
to keep within call of you in case of need. You know I’m armed now and
that makes a great difference to both of us.”
Mary listened very attentively to all he said. As soon as he had
finished she replied without any hesitation:
“I don’t mind it at all now that you are on the island again. Before
you came back I was really afraid at times. You see I was all alone
with these terrible men. Now I feel brave again. Don’t worry about
me. I’ll be able to take care of myself alright, but I really think I
should be going back now before the airplane comes in again.”
Before Mary got up to go they both glanced cautiously around the
sheltering rock to make sure that everything was clear. There was still
no sign of the outlaw aircraft in the harbor. For several seconds they
both looked at each other in silence, then Mary put out her hand and
Redmond grasped it.
“Au Revoir,” she said simply.
That was all. A moment later she was already walking resolutely toward
the harbor.
From behind the sheltering form of the rock he watched, his mind a prey
to a thousand fears over her safety and the disturbing thought that his
judgement in sending her back might eventually prove to have been wrong.
Mary walked steadily forward. Not once did she turn back, although
she was strongly tempted to. She was wondering whether Redmond was
staying at the rock, or whether he had already left for the other side
of the island. She was in high spirits. The gravity of the situation
confronting her did not impress itself upon her mind in any way.
Somehow, subconsciously, the conviction that everything would turn out
alright had settled upon her, removing all fears that had beset her
a short time ago. Her spirits were as buoyant now as they had been
depressed a few hours ago. The pendulum of life had swung to the side
of hope at last.
When she neared the beach she saw the airplane turn the headland on the
eastern side of the harbor as it moved along the surface of the sea.
She stopped abruptly, then watched a while, as it came slowly in toward
its mooring. As it got closer she commenced to walk slowly up and down
as though she had been doing nothing else at any time.
It was not long before the crew had secured the machine to its mooring
and made their way ashore. Johnston was in the lead, and Mary went
over toward him. The unusual greeting surprised the pirate’s chief
lieutenant, and he exclaimed:
“What’s the matter, Miss?”
“Levanter had an accident,” she replied. “That’s what I came to tell
you. His leg is hurt. He’s in the hut. He says he was shot, but I don’t
know what’s the matter.”
“Shot!” exclaimed Johnston incredulously. “Who could have shot him?”
“That’s what I can’t say,” answered Mary truthfully enough.
Johnston clearly showed his perplexity.
“That sounds dam’ funny to me--Oh! excuse me, Miss,” he blurted
apologetically, “but I can’t get that at all. Well, anyway, let’s go
over and see what’s happened.”
Mary went after him as he strode rapidly toward the hut where the
pirate was lying. He was already inside the room before she reached the
door. He went over to the cot and asked vigorously:
“What in ’ell’s happened?”
“I’ve been shot, Walter,” replied Levanter weakly.
“Who the devil could shoot you?”
“I don’t know. I was talking to Mary when it happened. I got it in the
leg.”
Without further ado Johnston bent over and examined the injured leg.
The Kanakas had been bathing the wound under the feeble instructions
Levanter had been able to give them.
By this time the rest of the crew had entered the room, and Mary was
standing by the door.
“Is there anything I can do?” she inquired.
“No,” replied Johnston gruffly.
He turned to the others and ordered them to get a piece of wood to
act as a splint to bind the pirate’s leg up. He then went over to the
emergency medicine chest and made a dressing for the wound.
All hands worked quickly, and it was not long before the injured leg
was bandaged up as well as could be done under the circumstances. There
was no doubt about the ease it brought Levanter. He expressed it in the
sigh that escaped his lips just before he fell into slumber.
After administrating his aid Johnston ordered the rest of the crew out
of the room, and went over to Mary.
“I want to talk to you, Miss,” he said as he led her out.
Outside the hut he continued:
“I’m a plain man, Miss, and I don’t stand for any monkey business--it’s
too risky in this job. Now tell me straight what happened.”
“Why I’ve told you all I can already,” said Mary. “There’s nothing else
I can tell you.”
“Well, he says he was talking to you when he was shot. Who shot him?”
“That’s the funniest part about it,” replied Mary. “I was talking to
him. He was very angry over something. He was talking to me when all of
a sudden he fell over. I didn’t hear a sound and I didn’t see any one.
Even the Kanakas were all inside the workshop. It may sound funny, but
honestly that’s the truth.”
“Well it’s dam’ funny to me,” he said with a perplexed air. “I can’t
understand it.”
“If it’s funny to you, just think how mysterious it was to me, because
I was standing with him,” she said.
A sudden thought entered Johnston’s mind. Looking straight at Mary, he
asked:
“Say was he trying to interfere with you?”
“Why do you ask that,” queried Mary in reply.
“Because I think you shot him,” replied Johnston menacingly.
CHAPTER THIRTY-THREE
Redmond stayed behind the rock, watching the trend of events closely
when the pirate crew came off the airplane and walked over to Mary. He
saw her engage in conversation with Johnston and watched them as they
hurried to the hut where they all lived.
Realizing that they would be inside for some considerable time and
that there was nothing further that he could do at present, he began
his journey across the island to the cove on the southern shore where
he had landed from the cruiser Farragut. He was anxious to get there
before darkness set in, as he was not sure that he could find the
hidden boat in the dark.
Instinctively he looked at his watch. It was already four thirty in
the afternoon, consequently he had no time to lose, as it would be
completely dark within an hour and a half. As soon as he was out of
sight from the pirate’s settlement, he quickened his step as fast as
the tropical growths about him would permit.
After a weary trudge he arrived at his destination, fortunately before
darkness set in. He readily located the hidden boat and took from
it the portable wireless set which had been included for emergency
purposes to communicate with the Farragut.
It was a very remarkable piece of apparatus, so efficiently constructed
that it could be carried in the hand and yet it had an effective range
of twenty-five miles in daylight. Its basic principle rested upon the
discovery successfully developed by Marconi and his assistants in
the year 1922, by which the electro-magnetic waves were concentrated
and reflected in one direction only, just as a beam of light is
concentrated and reflected in a narrow band of brilliance by a mirror
reflector.
Its portability was obtained by the fact that it radiated waves of only
a quarter of a meter in length. To get such radiation an alternating
current of 1,200,000,000 cycles per second had to be produced. This
terrifically high frequency was obtained from a wonderful development
of the vacuum tube--the Alladin’s lamp of radio--which had such an
efficient filament that it operated from a very small dry cell.
The reflecting medium consisted of a parabolic frame arranged around
the transmitter, on which were strung a number of wires which acted as
the reflecting antennae. Each of these wires was one wavelength long,
in other words--a quarter of a meter.
The apparatus which had been given to Redmond was designed for wireless
telephone transmission and reception. A small microphone and telephone
were included, both of which were arranged on a holder in such fashion
that when the ’phone was at the ear of the operator the microphone
naturally came before the mouth. A small push button in the center of
the handle switched the apparatus over from the transmitting to the
receiving condition and vice versa.
The set could either be operated upon the ground where the direction
of communication was known, or from the operator’s shoulder in other
cases. For the latter purpose a leather sling was attached to the
framework supporting the small aerials, by which it could be suspended
from the neck, thus leaving the hands of the operator free. This was a
very necessary provision because the telephone-microphone had to be in
one hand, and the reflector worked with the other when searching for
another station whose direction was unknown.
Since Redmond did not know the whereabouts of the cruiser, which he
hoped was on its way to replace the damaged Farragut, he picked up the
apparatus, slung it across his shoulder and walked down the shelving
rock which jutted out into the cove.
He took a position where he could command the entire southern, eastern
and western approaches to the island. Although he did not know over
what course the new cruiser would come, he had an idea that it would be
pretty close to that which the Farragut followed when it brought him
from Honolulu back to Patrocinio. With the aid of his pocket compass he
figured out the bearing of this course, then turning on the current to
the filament of his vacuum tube, commenced to call:
“Hello! Hello!”
For four weary hours he kept up the incessant calling, breaking it
only at intervals in order to listen for a possible reply. Not a sound
came to him from the black expanse beyond. By midnight he had given up
all idea of getting in touch with any government vessel. After all, he
thought, this was only the day after the Farragut had placed him ashore
and the possibility of any relief ship being in the neighborhood so
soon was very slight. He had gone there on the bare possibility that
one of the other cruisers which were patrolling in the vicinity might
have been intercepted and ordered to Patrocinio.
Having come to the conclusion that further calling was useless, Redmond
groped his way ashore in the darkness, placed his apparatus beneath
some foliage and lay down and slept.
The following morning he set up his radio in the lifeboat and made his
way to his cave. During his previous stay he had discovered a narrow
ledge inside just above his head. Further investigation now showed
that it would make an ideal couch and, moreover, a good place to lay
in hiding in the event that he was closely pressed in any search that
might be made.
After a brief rest during the noon-day heat he made his way cautiously
to the rock where he had always met Mary. He lay down alongside it and
watched, but though he stayed there practically until sundown, he did
not see a soul.
It was with very downcast heart that he made his way back to his crude
habitation. He was very worried about the safety of Mary more so
because of his inability to do anything that would help her. If he had
only caught a glimpse of her even without being able to speak to her,
his mind would have been much easier. As it was, he was a prey to all
kinds of grave doubts.
He decided earlier in the day that it was practically useless to go
back to the southern cove for at least three days, consequently he had
to make daily trips to the rendezvous instead, in order to keep as
close a watch over the pirate crew as possible and protect Mary, if
necessary.
The next day passed as had the preceding one, without a sight of Mary,
although on this day Redmond had seen the crew of the pirate craft
moving about at various tasks around the hut and upon the airplane.
Again with heavy heart, and weary mind and body he gave up his
monotonous vigil and went back to his cave.
CHAPTER THIRTY-FOUR
On the fourth day Redmond woke up uneasily. He was tortured by a mental
uneasiness such as oftentimes precedes events of great moment in life.
He had the feeling of impending disaster and a gloomy mood cast its
overshadowing mantle about him, penetrating not only his mind but also
his body until it seemed to sap all his strength.
He tried vainly to cast it from him, but his efforts were of no avail.
Sluggishly and almost sullenly he forced himself forward and made his
way to the meeting place. Once there, he threw himself down behind the
rock and almost automatically peered out as cautiously as ever upon the
beach below.
What he saw immediately dispelled the shadows of gloom and galvanized
him into alert attention. The entire piratical crew with Johnston in
the lead was walking down to the airplane. In the rear were some of the
Kanakas, carrying packages which he rightly guessed were supplies.
He quickly surmised that they were about to make a flight, and he
watched them with the keenest interest. It did not take long to
transfer the load the Kanakas had carried into the airplane, and within
a short time afterwards the machine taxied over the surface of the
water and took off into the air.
Redmond was well covered where he was, as the tropical vegetation was
quite thick about the rock. His previous stay upon the island had
proven that there was no prospect of his being seen from the air, even
when the machine flew low over the island, which it rarely did. On this
occasion it flew straight over sea, climbing rapidly as it went.
Shortly after the Kanakas had returned to the hut Redmond’s heart leapt
with joy, as he saw Mary emerge from the living house. She looked
around a few moments and began to walk toward the rock. Redmond could
scarcely restrain his impulsive desire to jump up and meet her. Only
the realization of the utter folly of such a move restrained him. As
she came within hearing distance, he called out:
“Good morning, Miss Mary! I’ve been very worried about you. You don’t
know how relieved I am.”
She quickly took her place near him, but still in full view of the
beach, pretending to be reading a book which she had purposely brought
with her.
“I am awfully glad to get here,” she said.
Redmond paused a few moments, wondering what to say, but finally
blurted out:
“I’ve been imagining all kinds of terrible things, Mary, and reviling
myself for having sent you back to that gang.”
Suddenly he stopped short and reddened deeply, as he realized that he
had called her familiarly for the first time in his life. She turned
toward him as he spoke and noticed his evident embarrassment. She
immediately divined the cause, but with true feminine wisdom passed it
by pretending not to have noticed it.
“I couldn’t get out before,” she said, “because they have been watching
me all the time. Levanter is very ill. He is quite feverish, and at
times has been a little delirious. He kept saying that the man Harrison
had betrayed him and that I had helped him to do it. The rest of them
couldn’t get any sense out of Levanter’s words but Johnston has become
very suspicious. He has been pestering me with questions all the time
he was not trying to get some sense out of Levanter. I’m sure that he
is really mad. Last night he threatened me and kept bullying me, trying
to find how Levanter was shot. At first he accused me of doing it but
he doesn’t any more. Last night he told me he was determined to find
out what was back of it all. He said he would go out in the airplane to
see if any of the government ships were ‘snooping around.’ Those were
the words he used. Really, I am afraid of him.”
Redmond thought long and deeply. He was convinced that the time for
action had arrived, but precipitate action might spoil all chance
of safety. What should he do? If only the other cruiser were here
they could both seize this opportunity and leave the island. He hated
himself at the present thought of sending the girl he loved back to the
pirate gang. The situation had already passed into the critical stage,
and there was no telling what might happen when the crew arrived.
Nor was there any doubt that the pirate crew would soon discover the
cruiser which must be heading toward the island by this time, now that
the pirates were in the air.
Suddenly he made up his mind. Turning to the girl beside him, he said
gravely:
“Mary, I’m not going to let you go back there.”
“But do you think that’s safe?” she inquired. “I’m not a bit afraid
as long as I know you are on the island, Mr. Redmond. They would come
after me surely, don’t you think, and you know your cruiser is not here
yet.”
“It’s a risk whatever we do,” he said, “and I prefer taking the risk
which I can control best. You know I’m armed now, and we could fight
them from cover if they came after us and located us. When they get
back this time, there’s no telling what they’ll do. That gang of
cut-throats would abandon Levanter readily enough if they figured it
was necessary to save their own skins. They are just as likely to fly
away tomorrow for good as not, and if they did they would probably take
you along with them. I hate to think of it and I’m not going to take
the chance. That man Johnston probably suspects that the government
authorities know the island he is on now. I feel sure that’s why he
went off in the airplane this morning.
“Do you really think it’s best then that I go with you?” asked Mary.
“Indeed I do,” replied Redmond, “and I think it best to get started
right away.”
CHAPTER THIRTY-FIVE
It was late in the afternoon when Johnston, in a towering rage, brought
the airplane down upon the waters of the harbor. He was convinced now
that they had been betrayed in some way which he could not understand.
During the lengthy flight which had been made at a very high altitude
and which covered an enormous stretch of the Pacific, he had observed
the cruiser New Orleans headed apparently toward the island. He had
watched it carefully and noted that the course and speed of the ship
were far too fast and straight for patrol duty. Moreover, he was
confirmed in his suspicion that her present course would take her
straight to Patrocinio.
It was until late in the day that he had first seen the ship. The
flight had first been in an easterly direction. In the course of it
several steamers had been observed but no particular attention was
paid to them. The New Orleans, however, was traversing such an unusual
course that she was distinctly conspicuous.
As soon as the airplane had been made fast, Johnston ordered the crew
ashore.
“You guys had better stick around here. You’ve got to do some mighty
snappy work pretty soon, I’m telling you,” he exclaimed.
He strode over to the huts and rushed into Levanter’s room. Seeing that
the latter was awake and ignoring his condition, he asked roughly:
“Where’s that woman?”
Levanter was very weak with pain and very feverish. He turned wearily
on his pillow and replied:
“I don’t know. I haven’t seen her today.”
“You’ve got us in a hell of a mess!” exclaimed Johnston. “I told you it
was a damn fool trick to bring her here, but you would have your way.
Now look at us.”
“What’s the matter?” inquired Levanter.
“Matter, hell! I can tell you what’s the matter when you tell me who
shot you.”
“I don’t know that either.”
“That’s what you’ve told me. There’s something to be real worried
about. Looks as though we’ll have to make a quick getaway from here.
There’s one of them damn government boats coming right here, and take
it from me there’s someone on this blasted island besides us, and I’m
going to find out who it is right now, and what’s more, your little
lady friend is going along with me to find ’em. If I’m right and they
get gay with their guns, they can take a chance of hitting her too.”
Without waiting for any further reply from his chief, Johnston went
over to Mary’s room, grasped the knob and pushed the door open, crying
out as he did so:
“Hey! young lady, come out here, I want to talk to you.”
Getting no response, he walked in. A quick but thorough search
convinced him that she was not inside. He then went out and, getting
the crew together, ordered them to make a search for her and bring her
to him as quickly as they could find her.
They scattered about to different parts around the shore of the harbor
where Mary had been in the habit of going. While they were thus engaged
Johnston went into the workshop, grabbed hold of the chief Kanaka and
put him through a heavy fire of questions about the movements of Mary
while he had been away on his flight.
The questioning was fruitless, and Johnston finally gave it up in
disgust. He went out and waited for his men to return. It was getting
close to sundown, and that fact added to his anger, as he realized that
he could do nothing after dark.
After a while all of the men returned, each bringing the same report
they had found no trace of the girl. Johnston strode up and down for a
few moments, swearing viciously while the men stood meekly by. Finally
he turned to them and said:
“Fix up everything on the ship. We’ve got to get out of here in a hell
of a hurry, and I want to have everything right. Get me?”
They did his bidding without question. As he watched he tried to work
out some plan of escaping the unwelcome situation. The disappearance of
Mary did not perplex him at all. Although he had not expected it, the
fact that she wasn’t around confirmed the guess he had made during the
flight that some one else was on the island. Why he had come to that
conclusion, he did not know; but once it entered his mind, he accepted
it as the most logical means of explaining Levanter’s wound.
How many strangers there were on the island, and how they got there, he
did not even bother to speculate upon. He just naturally accepted the
belief that Harrison in some way or other had betrayed them.
As soon as the men had completed the work of putting fuel and
provisions aboard the airplane, he ordered them to place the most
valuable and most easily removable loot gathered from the three
airships shot down by the pirate in the airplane. This done, he said:
“Beat it, and get something to eat quick. When you’re through bring
your guns out with you. We may need ’em. You’ve got a bunch of work to
do tonight.”
CHAPTER THIRTY-SIX
No sooner had Redmond made up his mind to take Mary Ingleton with him
than they both set out for the other side of the island. It was the
first time she had been beyond the rock which had always been their
meeting place. When they came to the cave in the center of the island
they took a short rest, and Redmond showed her the place where he had
lived so long. They soon started out again, but the progress was very
slow, as Mary was not used to the rough going, and he had to assist her
quite frequently.
She was quite tired out by the time they reached the southern cove.
Redmond got some blankets, which were stowed away in the boat, and laid
them out, so that she could lie down and rest awhile. He then went out
and plucked some of the tropical fruit and brought it to her, as well
as a beaker full of water from the nearby stream. She took the food
gratefully, and, after eating, fell into a light sleep.
In the meantime Redmond brought out his portable wireless set and
carried it over to the rock where it would be in readiness for use
as soon as darkness set in. He also took out the spare gun he had
brought in the boat and laid it alongside Mary for her use in case of
emergency. His own gun he carried slung across his shoulder all the
time, and in addition had a revolver in the holster strapped to his
waist.
These preparations served to keep his mind away from the worrying
thoughts regarding the wisdom of his present move. Once the tasks were
completed, however, they came back to torture him. He sat down beside
Mary, slipped the rifle from his shoulder and let it drop between his
hands where it would be ready for instant use. With every sense keenly
alert, his ears were strained for any unusual sound that might come
from the part of the island they had just left.
Thus he watched and waited but nothing happened.
As the sun began to race toward the Western horizon he gently awoke the
sleeping girl beside him.
“It will be dark soon, Mary,” he said, “and we’ll have to be very
careful then. I’m going to start calling on the wireless as soon as the
sun goes down, and I want you to be on the watch for the gang while I
do it.”
Mary was fully refreshed from her sleep and was in buoyant spirits.
“It’s all awfully exciting,” she said, with a little laugh. “You would
scarcely believe it, but I feel really happy for the first time since
I have been on this wretched island.”
Redmond’s heart beat rapidly and he turned quick toward her. What did
those fateful words really mean? With difficulty he restrained his
impulse to grasp her within his arms and tell her of the love which he
felt for her. His calmer judgement intervened before he could execute
the dictates of his heart.
“I’m very glad,” was all he could say, and even that escaped his lips
in the most incoherent manner.
He then went over to the rock where he had left his portable radio
set. Taking it up over his shoulders, he began to send out the general
call which had been agreed upon when the Farragut’s crew had passed
him ashore, listening now and then for a possible reply. Carefully and
slowly he searched in every direction with the reflectors as he worked.
It was a monotonous task and one which required the utmost
concentration--a task to try the patience of even the most persistent
man. Redmond was made of the stuff that knows no defeat. He vigorously
quashed the desire which naturally sprang up within his mind to drop
his efforts because of their futility and applied himself still more
earnestly to the task before him.
For two hours he kept it up, his low toned, oft repeated, “Hello.
Check” the code call agreed upon becoming more and more wearisome as
the time passed on. Ever and anon he would pause and peer through the
darkness toward the dimly outlined figure of the girl who was keeping
watch over the northern approaches to the little cove.
She was sitting up alongside the rock, resting against it, but in such
position that he could clearly see her outlined figure. The night was
dark, in spite of the stars studding the heavens.
Thus passed the early part of the evening, and lapsed into the second
watch of the night when suddenly there came an abrupt halt in the
monotonous call of Redmond’s oft repeated, “Hello. Check.”
Rapidly he made a few delicate adjustments on the set about his
shoulders and, holding his mouth a little closer to the microphone in
his hand, said:
“Hello! What ship is that?”
This break in the monotony aroused Mary from the stupor which had been
enveloping her gradually, and she involuntarily straightened up, keenly
alert. Her first impulse was to inquire what had happened, but she
quickly suppressed it and waited patiently.
“Where are you now?” was the next question Redmond asked over his
’phone.
He had picked up the long expected relief ship and learned that it was
the “New Orleans,” and to his great joy had also been told that Captain
Moore of the “Farragut” was in command.
“Wait a moment and I’ll find out,” came the response from the operator
on the war-vessel.
Redmond took advantage of their brief respite to turn to Mary and tell
her the gladsome news. She was so excited that she made a few steps
toward him, but he cautioned her to remain and listen as attentively as
the wireless conversation would allow for any intruder.
A few seconds later the voice came back in the receivers upon his ears:
“The Captain says we are about fifty miles SSE of you right now.”
“Fine!” replied Redmond. “Tell him I have got a chart of the mine
positions around the island, and he can come up within eight miles of
the cove, but no closer. A small launch can be used for the landing.
Tell him I’ve got Miss Ingleton here at the cove, and it is imperative
that she be taken off tonight. The pirates are hunting us now.”
The operator acknowledged the message and after a pause came back on
his transmitter and said:
“Captain says he is putting on full steam and will have a boat there in
two hours from now.”
With a sigh of relief Redmond unstrapped the apparatus and laid it
carefully upon the rock, so that it was still pointing in the same
direction as it was when he had been conversing with the operator of
the “New Orleans.”
He then went over to the place where his companion was sitting.
“I’ve got some great news for you, Mary,” he said as he looked at
her intently in the darkness. While he could not see her features, he
could, by that inexplicable means which sometimes permits us to divine
another’s thoughts, tell what her feelings were. He continued before
she could speak.
“I hope you won’t mind my calling you Mary. I’ve just picked up the
other cruiser. It will be here in two hours, and they are going to take
you right off the island tonight.”
Mary’s heart was too full for words. The moment she had been praying
for and hoping for and looking forward to for months had at last
arrived. Soon she would be on her way back to her parents. The
possibility overwhelmed her and left her momentarily speechless.
Redmond misinterpreted her silence and blurted out:
“Really, Miss Mary, I’m sorry, but--er--”
His floundering brought her back to realities and she rapidly
intervened.
“Oh, dear, there’s nothing to apologize for. You are splendid. I don’t
know how I shall ever be able to thank you for all that you have done
for me. I’ve been waiting for this moment a long time, but it came so
suddenly that I did not know just what to say. Really I can’t believe
it even now. It all seems like a dream,--too good to be true.”
“Then you are not angry with me?” asked Redmond with relief.
“Of course not, Howard,--how could I be?” she replied with a
coquettish laugh.
It was the first time she had ever used his name and it electrified him.
“Mary,” he exclaimed impulsively and stopped abruptly.
She waited for a few moments, then said simply:
“Well, Howard?”
“I was just going to say that it will seem like a long time before the
boat gets here,” he replied lamely.
“Oh!” she ejaculated.
There was something in that simple sound which so clearly expressed
disappointment, that it aroused all the conflicting emotions he had
been prey to ever since he realized his love for her. Again he felt
those alternate doubts and hopes which confounded his otherwise
decisive nature and robbed him of the power to speak his mind
unhesitatingly. He was too afraid of a refusal, and rather than risk
it, he chose to remain quiet.
Mary intuitively had long since guessed his secret, and she fully
realized the cause of his embarrassment. Somehow the happiness she
experienced when the realization of her hope of escape from the pirate
came was not an altogether unalloyed feeling. There was a new and
strange element in it, and in her heart she knew what it was. For
several seconds both were lost in deep thought.
Mary finally broke the silence by asking him:
“What are you going to do when we get on the cruiser?”
“I’m coming back here,” he replied.
“But what for?” queried Mary in alarm.
“Well,” he said slowly, “I’m going to stick around ’till we’ve settled
with this outfit. Besides, the government people have asked me to do
it, and I can’t refuse them. Anyway I don’t want to be a quitter, and
it will be a great pleasure to see the finish of this gang.”
She did not reply. What he said however, instilled within her a fear
which she had never before experienced, a fear over another’s safety.
She wanted to urge him not to return to the island, but hesitation and
a certain delicate inhibition prevented her from doing that.
Neither spoke for the next half hour each being far too engrossed with
his own thoughts to indulge in conversation.
Redmond kept automatically sweeping the blackness of the night in all
directions seaward in continuous and trained observation. Suddenly he
exclaimed:
“I can see a light. It must be the cruiser.”
“Where?” she asked.
“Look straight along my finger and you will see it,” he replied,
holding out his arm and pointing his finger toward the faint pin-point
of light in the distance.
“Oh! yes, I see it,” she exclaimed joyfully. “Oh, dear! It’s just too
wonderful for words.”
Redmond got up. “I’m going to speak to him,” he said. He then walked
over to the place where he had left his wireless apparatus. He let it
lay open upon the rock, merely picking up the microphone and switching
on the current.
“Hello! ‘New Orleans,’” he called.
The answer came immediately, then he continued:
“We can see your lights now. When do you expect to send a boat?”
There was a short pause, and the operator came back:
“Captain says he will come to you in ten minutes and put out a launch
right away. He’s not going to take any chances of coming any closer
tonight.”
“All right,” responded Redmond. “We’ll be waiting for you. I’m going to
turn this off now.”
He then went back to his companion and told her the news.
“You might as well come over to the rock now, Mary, so we’ll be ready
when the boat gets here.”
She assented, and he assisted her over the difficult ground in the
darkness. Then they both sat down.
Fifteen minutes later they heard the smooth toned exhaust of the
power launch as it plowed its way through the water toward them, and
shortly afterwards they were both outlined vividly in the rays of the
searchlight which was suddenly thrown on by the oncoming boat.
“Thank God!” he said fervently. “You are safe at last, Mary.”
It did not take long for the launch to pull up alongside the rock.
The maneuvre was greatly assisted by the illuminating rays of the
searchlight. A couple of sailors held it fast to the rock by means of
boat-hooks, and an officer sprang ashore.
“Good evening,” he said, then added after bowing: “My name is Lockwood.”
“This is Miss Ingleton,” replied Redmond, who then introduced himself
and continued: “I think we had better push off right away, Lieutenant.
There’s no telling how soon that pirate gang will be after us.”
They both assisted Mary into the launch, and Lockwood gave the order to
let go. The words had scarcely left his mouth when a shot rang out from
the foliage fringing the cove.
“Douse that light,” yelled Lockwood as he rang the engine bell for full
speed ahead.
CHAPTER THIRTY-SEVEN
The run to the cruiser was quickly made by the launch with no
casualties, despite the sudden appearance of the pirates at the cove.
“By George! That was a close shave,” exclaimed Lockwood. “If we’d been
a few minutes later some one would have been hurt for sure. They would
certainly have hit one of us with that searchlight on.”
As soon as they got aboard they went into Captain Moore’s cabin. The
captain greeted Mary effusively and congratulated her on her fortunate
rescue. Mary briefly acknowledged his solicitations and then asked
anxiously:
“How was my mother when you left Honolulu, Captain?”
Redmond was standing back of her, and he put up a warning finger to his
lips, which the captain fortunately saw in time.
“I am afraid, Miss Ingleton,” he replied cautiously, “that she is not
so well.”
While on the island she had often asked Redmond about her mother, but
he assured as best he could and always adroitly changed the subject
before she could question him further.
On this occasion Mary tried to press the captain for more details, but
he told her that he had not been given any direct information. He also
studiously refrained from mentioning anything about her father. Seeing
that she could get no further information, Mary asked disappointedly:
“How soon can we get back to Honolulu then, captain?”
“Really I can’t hold out any hope for you there either, Miss Ingleton.
I’ve just got a code message from the Navy Department in Washington
with instructions to wait here until further orders are received. I
had planned to take you back right away, but this order came in just
a few minutes ago, and I will be compelled to obey it. I don’t know
just what’s going to happen, but I am going to drop out of sight of the
island for the remainder of the night and come back after sun-up. We’ve
got a cabin all fixed for you, Miss Ingleton, and I hope you will find
everything all right. We shall do everything we possibly can to make
you comfortable.”
Mary felt keenly disappointed, but did not express it. After a short
conversation she retired to her room, tired out after the strenuous and
exciting day she had experienced. After she had gone Redmond said:
“I’m glad you didn’t say anything, Captain, that would have indicated
she had lost her mother. She’s been through a terrible ordeal, and I’m
afraid the shock of the news would be too much for her. We’ll have to
break it to her gradually after she has had a long rest.”
Then, changing the subject, he gave the captain an outline of what had
occurred since they had last seen each other.
“You say the pirate is in very bad condition,” remarked Captain Moore.
“Well, that changes the situation completely. It seems to me this would
be a good time to land and go after him.”
“Well, I don’t know,” replied Redmond. “I hadn’t thought of it.”
“By George! It looks to me like the right thing to do, especially as we
know just what the situation around the island is now that we have his
mine chart. I’ll advise Honolulu by code through wireless and see what
they have to say about it.”
Having made up his mind on this point, the captain worked out the
necessary code words and then sent the message in to the wireless
operator with instructions to dispatch it immediately. This done, he
turned to Redmond and said:
“The chances are that Honolulu will refer the matter to Washington
before replying to me, but if they happen to agree with me on the
advisability of landing now, would you be willing to go along and guide
the landing party?”
“Why of course, I would,” replied Redmond.
“Well, that’s fine. I don’t know whether that gang is still hanging
around this side of the island or not, but we can cover your landing
with our light guns. That will hold them back until you get ashore and
under cover.”
“I don’t think they’ll stick around here,” said Redmond. “They’re more
likely to go back and be ready to make a getaway in the airplane, take
a chance on landing somewhere without being seen, and then get back
to civilization without being caught. That’s the way I figure it out,
although, of course, you can’t tell just what they will do.”
Captain Moore called in his executive officer, and for the next hour
all three went over every possible detail in the event that a landing
would be decided upon. Redmond produced the rough chart of the island
he had drawn during his first stay on it, and he pointed out to the two
officers the more important aspects of its topography. They had just
about completed their preliminary plans when an orderly entered the
room with a message for Captain Moore. The latter took it, tore it open
and hurriedly scanned its contents.
“It’s in code!” he exclaimed. “Wait a moment ’till I decode it. It’s
the answer from Honolulu.”
The others waited almost breathlessly while the captain performed the
task of translation. This done, he turned to them and read:
“Concur in landing proposal. Important reinforcements will reach you at
daybreak.”
He paused for a moment, then continued:
“Well, we couldn’t wish for anything better than that. It looks like
the beginning of the end to me now.”
“I wonder what the reinforcements will be?” said Redmond.
“I haven’t the faintest idea,” answered Captain Moore. “We’ll see soon
enough in the morning. Is everything satisfactory as we have planned
it?”
“Yes.”
“All right then, I’ll steam up at daybreak and be ready to put you
ashore with a party and cover your landing if necessary.”
CHAPTER THIRTY-EIGHT
On the following morning when the sun burst over the eastern horizon
with the sudden blaze of tropical brilliance the cruiser “New Orleans”
was already within a few miles of Patrocinio’s southern shore. The
landing party was standing by fully armed, ready to board the launches
which were already in the water alongside the cruiser.
On the bridge Captain Moore and the navigating officer were scanning
the island through their marine glasses for any sign of the pirates.
As soon as Redmond came up on the deck the order to move was given and
the men filed down the accommodation ladder into the boats. When this
task had been completed the boats cast off.
Each of the launches was equipped with a one pounder quick fire gun in
its bows, each of these manned by a gunner. On the cruiser the guncrews
were standing by the six inch rifles ready to shell the island in case
an attack was made upon the boats during their passage to the landing
place.
As the boats left the cruiser Lieutenant Lockwood, who had been placed
in command of the landing party, turned to Redmond and said:
“Do you think that outfit is still on this side of the island?”
“Well, of course I can’t say,” replied Redmond, “but my guess is that
they are not. I think they withdrew to the other side.”
“Well, we’ll soon find out,” said Lockwood with a laugh.
The run to the beach was quickly made, and a landing affected without
any untoward event. Lockwood got his men lined up and was about to
give the order to advance when a terrific explosion seaward halted him
abruptly.
“My God what was that?” he exclaimed as he, in unison with the rest,
turned and looked south. One quick glance revealed the cause.
Flying moderately low, the pirate airplane was sweeping around the
cruiser in rapid vicious circles in a maneuvre of attack. The “New
Orleans” was already under way, gathering headway very fast and
zigzaging on her course.
As the men ashore watched with pent up excitement they saw a flash as
the cruiser opened up with its anti-aircraft guns a vigorous cannonade
upon the pirate. It was clear that the latter was maneuvring for the
best position to bomb the cruiser, and the explosion which had been
heard ashore was undoubtedly caused by the first bomb dropped to find
the range. It had not apparently come close enough to do any damage.
The effect of the rapid fire from the “New Orleans” was quickly
evidenced by the higher altitude which the pirate climbed to.
“Gee!” exclaimed Lockwood, “that’s great shooting. The higher they
force him the less chance he has to hit ’em. Go to it boys!” he cried
excitedly.
For the moment all caution and discipline disappeared, and the men
crowded around their officer to watch the unusual skirmish, shouting
unheard words of encouragement to their distant shipmates.
It was not long before the second bomb fell. It hit the water with
a resounding explosion, sending up a mountainous wave which blotted
out the cruiser from the watchers ashore who strained their utmost to
follow the effect. By this time the cruiser was close to the horizon,
and it was difficult indeed to see it.
“Good God! That was close,” exclaimed Lockwood anxiously. A few seconds
later he sighed with relief as he saw the cruiser emerge from the
obscuring but diminishing wave.
The whole thing had only occupied a few seconds but it seemed like an
eternity to those ashore. Throughout the suspense there had been a ray
of comfort for them in the continuous cracking reports which told them
that the aerial guns of the war-vessel were still going.
Suddenly there was a lull in the sound of the firing. Instinctively
all ashore looked up, and in the sky above the distant horizon they
could dimly see a number of specks about the pirate aircraft which
by this time was barely visible. Pretty soon there came to them the
staccato roar of machine gun fire.
“Hurrah!” shouted the men in glee, while Lockwood added joyously:
“There are the reinforcements. It’s a squadron of our airplanes.
Captain Moore’s quit firing because he doesn’t want to hit any of our
fellows. That’s it sure.”
Redmond was not so jubilant. In fact he was greatly worried because in
his mind there surged the memory of the last aerial battle between the
pirate and the government aircraft. He immediately realized that unless
the latter were much better equipped now, they did not stand a chance,
despite their superior numbers.
The battle was being fought at terrific speed, and Johnston was
evidently using every maneuvre he could execute in fighting the
squadron. The changing tactics brought the contending machine nearer to
the island.
At this point Redmond observed that the government pilots were not
flying in squadron formation. Instead they were spread out widely and
were at different altitudes, with at least five hundred feet separating
any two of them. He rightly guessed that this tactic was being followed
as a result of the experience gained in the previous encounter with the
pirate.
At every opportunity each of the government ships fired a burst of
tracer bullets at the pirate, who was maneuvring his plane with great
skill, but Redmond’s expert eye quickly saw that Johnston, good as he
undoubtedly was, could not compare with Levanter, and he realized that
in this equality alone lay the greatest opportunity for the government
craft.
The pirate gunner was fighting back vigorously whenever a chance
occurred. He too was using his machine gun for all it was worth. By
this time the fight was directly over the beach on which the landing
party was standing. Every man had his neck craned, watching intently,
almost breathlessly.
Suddenly the leading government plane shot straight across the nose of
the pirate machine, level with it, and released a burst of fire which
raked the pirate at short range and apparently damaged his starboard
propeller.
Undaunted the pirate let loose with his three inch gun, loaded with
one of the deadly liquid oxygen shells. It caught the government ship
squarely. A violent flash of flame broke out momentarily like a jewel
in the daylight, and what was left of the government craft plunged like
a plummet into the ocean, a hundred yards from the beach. The first
blood was with the pirate.
CHAPTER THIRTY-NINE
The momentary victory of the pirate was dearly bought. He was no longer
maneuvring as easily as he had been doing. His craft had become very
sluggish on the turns and was making them only with great difficulty,
while the uneven whir of his propellers emphasized the trouble he was
experiencing. The government forces quickly observed this and began to
close in on it steadily, but somewhat cautiously.
Johnston, realizing the turn in favor of his enemies, began to climb,
but his ship was no longer superior to the government craft in this
respect, and they easily maintained their advantage by keeping well
above him.
Throughout these tactics the antagonists kept up a desultory fire with
their machine guns, but no material damage was effected on either side.
The latest maneuvre had taken both forces to a considerable altitude,
and the men ashore had some difficulty in following the progress of the
battle against the brilliant sky.
For some time the fight continued in this manner without decisive
action. Redmond was feeling easier because he realized now that the
odds which were in favor of the pirate at the beginning of the battle
had been neutralized by the heroic action of the pilot who sacrificed
himself by deliberately running his ship across the pirate’s nose to
fire upon him at close range.
Redmond looked seaward. The cruiser “New Orleans” had steamed in again
and was moving around at high speed on an uneven course. He turned his
gaze upward again, and as he did so an exclamation of surprise escaped
his lips.
All of the aerial craft were lower, but one of the government ships was
directly above and very close to the pirate, traveling at the same rate
of speed while the others were concentrating a burst of fire upon the
outlaw plane.
Suddenly a small black object fell from the particular government ship
which was in such excellent position above the pirate. A blinding flash
burst where the latter had been, followed by a thunderous crash which
shook even those upon the ground by the intensity of its concussion.
A gasp of awe escaped them as they watched intently. Rapidly the flash
merged into the sunlight, and out of it there fell a few blackened
remnants of what had been the aerial scourge of the Pacific. Straight
into the sea the wreckage plunged.
The pirate was conquered at last!
The suddenness of the ending left them spell-bound. As they watched
they saw the ship which had struck the deathblow of the pirate
spiralling down unevenly like a wounded bird, evidently in serious
distress. The other machines were also descending.
“Good God!” was all that Lockwood could say, but his expression clearly
indicated the relief he felt.
For several seconds they stood in amazed silence until all of the
aircraft had descended upon the heaving surface of the ocean. By
remarkable skill the pilot of the injured ship had succeeded in
landing, pulling his craft out of its spin at the crucial moment, but
it was indeed the roughest kind of a landing.
The other machines with their wings retracted taxied over to him as
rapidly as they could go. They were none too soon, for by the time they
reached him the damaged airplane, badly waterlogged, was being pounded
by the heavy swell which surged over it. With great difficulty they
succeeded in rescuing its crew just before the airplane disappeared
below the waves.
While the rescue was being effected the cruiser steamed up to the
scene, and the rest of the squadron went alongside her.
It was quite some time before Lieutenant Lockwood recovered from the
amazement which had left him enthralled during the thrilling encounter
in the skies. Moreover, he found it very difficult to realize that the
pirate machine had been completely destroyed and its crew annihilated.
After he had come back to realities he stood for a few minutes
irresolute, then turning toward Redmond, he ejaculated:
“I wonder what we’d better do now?”
Before the latter could reply one of the landing party cried out:
“The cruiser’s signalling us, sir.”
All hands watched the semaphore arms above the bridge of the war-vessel
as they moved up and down rapidly forming the words of the message.
Lockwood who had read it said:
“He’s instructing us to proceed across the island at once. The
cruiser’s going to steam around. Let’s go.”
CHAPTER FORTY
Upon the “New Orleans” a most distressing incident was being enacted as
the cruiser proceeded around the eastern side of Patrocinio Island. The
commander of the squadron which had downed the pirate was none other
than Kenneth Fitzgerald, and he it was who had dropped the chemical
bomb which destroyed the outlaw. He was now lying unconscious on a
hastily prepared cot aboard the warship in serious condition, with the
ship’s surgeon in attendance.
So close had he been to the pirate when the fatal bomb was released
that the repercussion had damaged his ship and stricken him seriously
by the full force of the concussion. By a supreme effort of will he had
summoned sufficient strength to guide his gyrating craft to a landing
and had collapsed completely.
His rescue under the existing conditions had been nothing short of
miraculous, and only through the quick work of the rest of the squadron
was it effected. They had performed the almost impossible in getting
him from the waterlogged machine through the heavy swell.
Mary Ingleton was at his side doing what little she could to assist
the surgeon’s efforts to revive him. She was in a highly nervous
state, following the excitement of the recent battle, but the serious
condition of Fitzgerald alarmed her and had a steadying effect upon her.
In the meantime Eric Brant, the second in command of the squadron, was
giving Captain Moore an account of the details which led up to the
aerial battle.
“At the time Captain Simmons was leaving Honolulu with the ‘New
Orleans,’” he said, “we were undergoing special secret instructions
with a new type of bomb which had just arrived from Washington.
“We were told that the experts in the Chemical Corps had succeeded in
duplicating the bombs manufactured by the pirate and, after further
work, had improved on them. Ours are fitted with a safety device which,
in the event of accident to one of our machines, automatically releases
the liquid gas without explosive effect.
“They are mounted on a special rack which has a release trigger that
sets a detonating cap on the bomb as it falls, so that it will explode
on hitting. The instructors told us that these bombs would practically
wipe out anything they struck.
“Mr. Fitzgerald was placed in command, and practically all of us had
been in the first fight with the pirate, so we knew just what we had to
expect from him.
“We all talked it over and we devised a new plan of attack, which we
practiced every day in the air while we were awaiting instruction
to move against him. In the first we were not able to attack him
vigorously because we were in each other’s way to a great extent. Our
new plan was designed to overcome this, and we practiced so as to be
in a position where we could all attack simultaneously without fear of
hitting each other.
“The most important part of our plan was to keep the pirate engaged
while one of the machines maneuvred to get directly over him, so that
the bomb could be dropped with a fair chance of hitting him squarely.
“We realized that our only chance to put an end to him was with one
of these bombs. Our machine gun fire was therefore planned to keep
him engaged so as to permit the main attacking machine to get into
position, ready to drop the bomb at the first opportunity.
“Our original instructions were to be ready to proceed on order, and
a supply ship was to follow up as rapidly as possible after we left.
We got the order sooner than we expected. It came hurriedly after
receipt of your wireless. We were told to proceed to the southern side
of the island and assist you. We were very surprised to see the pirate
attacking you, as we had not expected to encounter him so soon.
“It put us in a very bad position as we were pretty nearly out of fuel
after our long flight. If the scrap had lasted much longer he would
have got us all for certain.
“I imagine that’s the reason Mr. Fitzgerald took such a terrible
chance, so as not to miss his mark. He was too close when he dropped
the bomb, and the shock damaged his ship. We were mighty lucky in being
able to get him out of the water, and he did a fine piece of work in
landing his ship under the circumstances.”
CHAPTER FORTY-ONE
As soon as he had received the instructions to proceed across the
island from the cruiser Lieutenant Lockwood lined up his men and gave
the order to advance. He took a position ahead of them, Redmond walking
alongside him, leading the way through the jungle. By noon the party
had reached the cave in the center of the island, and a halt was made
to eat and rest during the heat of the day.
At three o’clock in the afternoon a fresh start was made, and an hour’s
brisk march brought the party to the rock where Redmond had so often
met Mary Ingleton.
The New Orleans was already lying off the entrance to the harbor
outside the mine belt which the pirate had laid down as a protection
for himself. Otherwise everything bore a normal appearance to Redmond.
The familiar wisp of blue smoke curling up idly from the workshop
chimney told him the Kanakas were busily engaged in their regular jobs.
“Do you think we’ll have any trouble with them?” Lockwood asked Redmond.
“I don’t think so,” replied the latter.
At this moment one of the men exclaimed:
“There’s a boat coming in from the ship, sir.”
“Well, I guess we’ll go down and meet it,” said Lockwood. He gave an
order to the chief petty officer to remain with the landing party until
he returned. He then set off with Redmond for the beach.
By the time they arrived there the boat was already tied up to the
old mooring ring of the pirate’s airplane, and two officers had come
ashore. One of them was the ship’s surgeon.
“I came along,” he told Lockwood, as soon as they caught up with one
another, “to see what condition Levanter is in. If he can be moved, the
captain’s instructions are to bring him aboard immediately.”
“Well! We might as well get over there right away,” remarked Lockwood
who then signalled to his men to join him. As soon as they came up he
instructed them to seize the workshop and bring the Kanakas out.
While the landing party was engaged in this task the three officers and
Redmond entered Levanter’s room in the living hut.
As they entered Redmond halted abruptly and an involuntary gasp of
astonishment escaped his lips. Levanter was lying on his cot, and the
Kanaka chief was alongside him. The pirate’s features had visibly
shrunk and his skin was tightly drawn across his hollowed cheeks. His
eyes stood out, uncanny and piercing, while the flush of fever which
suffused his cheeks gave him an unnatural appearance.
He started in surprise as he saw the strangers enter his room. With an
effort he raised his weakened body upon his elbows and then exclaimed:
“Who are you? How did you get here?”
Redmond went over to his bedside.
“I’m the man who shot you,” he said. “You have never seen me before,
but I’ve been on your island for weeks. We are here now because you
have come to the end of your rope.”
The pirate sank back upon his pillow. For several moments he remained
motionless. Finally he asked:
“Where is my ship?”
“It’s lying on the bottom of the ocean,” replied Redmond.
“What happened to Johnston and my crew, then?”
“They are lying there with it. If it’s any satisfaction to you, they
died fighting.”
Levanter raised himself again, his eyes flashing with hate.
“Damn you!” he snapped. “If I’d been there you wouldn’t have had a
chance.”
“That’s just where you are wrong,” said Redmond coolly. “The government
beat you at your own game.”
At this moment the surgeon stepped forward and pushed Redmond back. He
saw how critical the pirate’s condition was, and was anxious to put
an end to the altercation which was rapidly causing the injured man’s
temperature to rise dangerously.
“Lie down,” he commanded.
“What are you going to do with me?” enquired Levanter as he obeyed.
“I’m going to find out what’s the matter with you,” replied the surgeon
who, after taking the pirate’s temperature and pulse, examined the
injured leg. He then dressed the wound as carefully as he could with
the limited facilities at his disposal. As soon as this task was
completed he went over to his two companions.
“We’ll have to get back to the ship as rapidly as possible and put him
in the sick bay. It’s a dangerous job. The shock will probably kill
him, but it’s our only chance to save him. He’ll die quick enough if
he’s left here.”
“I didn’t know he was as badly as that,” said Redmond.
“He’s in pretty bad shape,” added the surgeon. “We’ve got to amputate
that leg, and there’s no time to lose. In fact, I think it’s too late
now.”
Without further ado Lockwood went out. The landing party had already
marshalled the Kanakas together outside the huts and was standing by
awaiting further instructions.
Lockwood called two of his men over to him and ordered them to carry
the pirate on the stretcher into the launch. He then instructed the
others to wait with the Kanakas until a boat could be sent over from
the warship to transfer the wounded pirate.
The two men quickly lifted the latter on the stretcher and then carried
him down to the landing place where the three officers assisted in
placing him aboard.
CHAPTER FORTY-TWO
As soon as the launch came up alongside the cruiser “New Orleans” it
was fastened to the block and tackle of its davit and hoisted up until
it was level with the main deck. When this had been done it was pulled
inboard, and from this position the wounded pirate was lifted out under
the supervision of the surgeon and carried down to the ship’s hospital.
Redmond and the two officers had previously got off the launch and had
gone up the accommodation ladder. Captain Moore was on deck to meet
them.
“Well, I guess our job’s done, captain,” said Redmond.
“Yes,” replied the commander. “We were very lucky in many ways,
especially in the fortunate arrival of our airplane squadron. The
government owes you a great deal, though. If it hadn’t been for your
splendid work, the pirate would have still been operating.”
Redmond flushed under the praise, stuttered a moment and changing the
embarrassing subject, said:
“How is the pilot of the ship which we brought down?”
“Ah! there’s where we were unlucky,” replied Captain Moore. “That pilot
was the commander of the squadron, and he’s in very bad shape suffering
from shock.”
“I’m sorry to hear that indeed. He certainly had his nerve attacking
the way he did. Who is he?”
“Commander Fitzgerald.”
“What!” exclaimed Redmond in astonishment.
The captain looked at him, surprised at the manner in which he spoke.
“Why, do you know him?” he asked.
“Yes,” said Redmond sharply.
“Well he’s on the quarterdeck now, resting easily the last time I saw
him. Miss Ingleton is nursing him. Do you want to see him?”
Redmond pondered a moment before replying. The news imparted to him
innocently enough by Captain Moore had brought him back from the realm
of action and excitement into that of sentiment. For several seconds
his mind was prey to a score of bitter thoughts. Again he fought with
himself as he realized that another man stood between him and the
possibility of his future happiness. The knowledge enraged him, and for
the first time in his life he experienced the violence of hatred.
He hated himself as well, and in his mind he railed at the fate which
had led him to the altar of love and then dashed happiness from his
grasp. He was more than ever convinced that Mary and Fitzgerald were
betrothed. The words uttered many weeks ago by the Base Commander at
Honolulu, which clearly indicated it, came back to taunt him as he
struggled with his conflicting emotions.
Finally his better nature began to exert itself. At least, he argued
with himself, Mary would be happy now, and after all that was the most
important thing. He turned to Captain Moore and said:
“I guess I’ll go over and see him.”
The two started aft. As they reached the quarterdeck Mary Ingleton
happened to glance up from the cot on which Fitzgerald was lying. She
jumped to her feet and rushed over to him, holding her hands out to
Redmond.
“Oh! I’m so glad to see you, Howard,” she exclaimed. “I was worried to
death about you while that dreadful fight was going on.”
Redmond was completely overcome by the warmth of her greeting, which he
did not expect. He took her hands in his, but managed to hold himself
in check.
“I’m so glad you’re glad, Mary,” he said.
His quiet reply dampened her enthusiasm, and she looked at him somewhat
puzzled. Captain Moore had already gone ahead toward Fitzgerald, so
they were left standing together. Redmond was the first to speak again.
“I was sorry to hear about Fitzgerald,” he said.
“Yes,” replied Mary, “he is seriously hurt.”
“It must have been a great blow to you, Mary. I hope he will soon get
well because you deserve happiness after all you have been through.”
“Why, Howard!” she exclaimed. “How strangely you speak! I don’t know
what you are talking about.”
“Aren’t you and he engaged?” queried Redmond.
“Why no,” laughed Mary. “Whatever put that silly notion in your head?”
“You’re not?” he exclaimed in surprise.
She heartily laughed at his astonishment, then she replied.
“No! I’m not engaged to anyone,” she said with a taunting air.
“Oh! Mary,” he gasped haltingly.
“Yes, Howard.”
“Oh! What can I say? I love you with all my heart. I’ve been dying to
tell you for a long, long time, but I thought you were already engaged,
and I didn’t dare.”
“Why you poor silly boy. I’ve known it for weeks,” she said gently.
“Can you love me too?” he pleaded.
She looked at him teasingly, with laughter in her eyes, watching his
evident anxiety. Then as the lines upon his face deepened she lowered
her glance and said:
“I do.”
Transcriber’s Note:
Obvious errors in punctuation have been silently corrected in this
version. Typos in proper names have been silently corrected. Minor
inconsistencies and archaic forms have been retained as printed.
In addition, the following changes have been made:
On page 16: bells to belles -From the moment of her debut she had
been one of the reigning _belles_ in Washington society
On page 21: too to to -Mary began _to_ eat
On page 21: magicent to magnificent -They saw the magnificent rivers
On page 25: persistant to persistent -In a subtle but persistent
manner
On page 26: occassionally to occasionally
On page 30: upfolded to unfolded -the scene unfolded below her
On page 51: hyherically to hysterically -Mrs. Ingleton began to cry
hysterically.
On page 52: reolver to revolver
On page 53: gave to have -He must have got tangled up
On page 61: may to my -Therefore my plan is this
On page 65: quadron to squadron
On page 68: recieved to received
On page 78: absoutely to absolutely -that absolutely confirms
On page 81: horiozn to horizon
On page 86: navval to naval
On page 94: obsolute to absolute -when they got an absolute sight on
On page 94: desdescent to descent -The battle was continued
throughout the maneuvre of descent
On page 95: possibe to possible
On page 108: there to three -at a point approximately three hundred
miles
On page 110: coversation to conversation
On page 110: sqadron to squadron
On page 114: occured to occurred
On page 114: manufacurer to manufacturer
On page 114: availabl to available
On page 116: aparently to apparently
On page 117: meteorogical to meteorological
On page 127: an to any -would pass up any chance to protect himself
On page 135: orginal to original
On page 141: possibilties to possibilities
On page 142: particuarly to particularly
On page 153: pursuade to persuade -She tried to persuade him
On page 155: unconscius to unconscious -How long I was unconscious
On page 159: buring to burning -lights burning
On page 162: vigilence to vigilance
On page 166: it to is -It is this
On page 175: us to use -it’s no use quarreling
On page 180: vaccuum to vacuum -vacuum of the container
On page 180: here to her -enable her to get away
On page 183: sincerety to sincerity -show of sincerity
On page 185: schoner to schooner
On page 199: were to where -at the cove where we land
On page 220: arange to arrange
On page 222: accomodation to accommodation
On page 226: waveleangth to wavelength
On page 226: cary to carry -it could easily carry his voice
On page 230: conjections to conjectures -depressing thoughts
concerning Mary and gloomy conjectures regarding her safety.
On page 235: [double of removed] -to keep a sharp watch for sight of
land.
On page 238: scurity to security
On page 250: expectently to expectantly -she strolled expectantly to
On page 253: contenntment to contentment
On page 253: tumultously to tumultuously
On page 259: would to wound -Without further ado Johnston bent over
and examined the injured leg. The Kanakas had been bathing the wound
under the feeble instructions Levanter had been able to give them.
On page 263: visa versa to vice versa
On page 263: [double to removed] had to be in one hand
On page 265: preceeding to preceding -The next day passed as had the
preceding one
On page 266: preceds to precedes -such as oftentimes precedes events
On page 273: stoodly to stood -while the men stood meekly by
On page 277: monotoonus to monotonous
On page 277: persistant to persistent
On page 292: too to to -higher altitude which the pirate climbed to
On page 295: his to this -the fight continued in this manner
On page 296: fllash to flash
On page 296: thundrous to thunderous
On page 296: suddeness to suddenness
On page 297: incicated to indicated -his expression clearly indicated
the relief he felt.
On page 300: devise to device -Ours are fitted with a safety device
On page 304: oficer to officer
On page 305: It to If -If it’s any satisfaction to you
On page 305: cooly to coolly -said Redmond coolly
On page 306: waiting to awaiting -standing by awaiting further
instructions.
*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE FLYING BUCCANEER ***
Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will
be renamed.
Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United
States without permission and without paying copyright
royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part
of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project
Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™
concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark,
and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following
the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use
of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for
copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very
easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation
of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project
Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may
do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected
by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark
license, especially commercial redistribution.
START: FULL LICENSE
THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG™ LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project
Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full
Project Gutenberg License available with this file or online at
www.gutenberg.org/license.
Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg
electronic works
1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg
electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or
destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg electronic works in your
possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a
Project Gutenberg electronic work and you do not agree to be bound
by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person
or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be
used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg electronic works
even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg electronic works if you follow the terms of this
agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg
electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.
1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the
Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection
of Project Gutenberg electronic works. Nearly all the individual
works in the collection are in the public domain in the United
States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the
United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
that you will support the Project Gutenberg mission of promoting
free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg
works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the
Project Gutenberg name associated with the work. You can easily
comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the
same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg License when
you share it without charge with others.
1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
other Project Gutenberg work. The Foundation makes no
representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
country other than the United States.
1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other
immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg License must appear
prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg work (any work
on which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the
phrase “Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed,
performed, viewed, copied or distributed:
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most
other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
of the Project Gutenberg™ License included with this eBook or online
at www.gutenberg.org. If you
are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws
of the country where you are located before using this eBook.
1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is
derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not
contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the
copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in
the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are
redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase “Project
Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply
either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or
obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg
trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is posted
with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
will be linked to the Project Gutenberg License for all works
posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the
beginning of this work.
1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg
License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg.
1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
Gutenberg License.
1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access
to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg work in a format
other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official
version posted on the official Project Gutenberg website
(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means
of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain
Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the
full Project Gutenberg License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg works
unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
access to or distributing Project Gutenberg electronic works
provided that:
• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
the use of Project Gutenberg works calculated using the method
you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed
to the owner of the Project Gutenberg trademark, but he has
agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid
within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are
legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty
payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in
Section 4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation.”
• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™
License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all
copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue
all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™
works.
• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of
any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
receipt of the work.
• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works.
1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project
Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different terms than
are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing
from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of
the Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set
forth in Section 3 below.
1.F.
1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project
Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™
electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may
contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate
or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
cannot be read by your equipment.
1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right
of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium
with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you
with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in
lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person
or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second
opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If
the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing
without further opportunities to fix the problem.
1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO
OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of
damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement
violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the
agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or
limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or
unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the
remaining provisions.
1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in
accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the
production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™
electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses,
including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of
the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this
or any Project Gutenberg work, (b) alteration, modification, or
additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg work, and (c) any
Defect you cause.
Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg
Project Gutenberg is synonymous with the free distribution of
electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
from people in all walks of life.
Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg’s
goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg collection will
remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
and permanent future for Project Gutenberg and future
generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see
Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org.
Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit
501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification
number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by
U.S. federal laws and your state’s laws.
The Foundation’s business office is located at 41 Watchung Plaza #516,
Montclair NJ 07042, USA, +1 (862) 621-9288. Email contact links and up
to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website
and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation
Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread
public support and donations to carry out its mission of
increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest
array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
status with the IRS.
The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular state
visit www.gutenberg.org/donate.
While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
approach us with offers to donate.
International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation
methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate.
Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg electronic works
Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project
Gutenberg concept of a library of electronic works that could be
freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and
distributed Project Gutenberg eBooks with only a loose network of
volunteer support.
Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed
editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
edition.
Most people start at our website which has the main PG search
facility: www.gutenberg.org.
This website includes information about Project Gutenberg,
including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
